OMRON NS15-TX01B-V2 (01) PDF MANUAL

FREE ENGLISH OMRON NS15-TX01B-V2 (01) PDF USER GUIDE

FREE ENGLISH OMRON NS15-TX01B-V2 (01) PDF USER MANUAL

FREE ENGLISH OMRON NS15-TX01B-V2 (01) PDF OWNER GUIDE

FREE ENGLISH OMRON NS15-TX01B-V2 (01) PDF OWNER MANUAL

FREE ENGLISH OMRON NS15-TX01B-V2 (01) PDF REFERENCE GUIDE

FREE ENGLISH OMRON NS15-TX01B-V2 (01) PDF INSTRUCTION GUIDE

FREE ENGLISH OMRON NS15-TX01B-V2 (01) PDF REFERENCE MANUAL

FREE ENGLISH OMRON NS15-TX01B-V2 (01) PDF INSTRUCTION MANUAL

FREE ENGLISH OMRON NS15-TX01B-V2 (01) PDF OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

CLICK HERE TO DOWNLOAD OMRON NS15-TX01B-V2 (01) PDF MANUAL

If this is not the document you want for this product, click here to see if we have any other documents for this product.

OMRON NS15-TX01B-V2 (01) PDF SUMMARY:

How do NS-series PTs work at FA production sites?

NS-series Programmable Terminals (PTs) are sophisticated operator interfaces that can automatically display information and perform operations as required at FA production sites. NS-series PTs can monitor line operating status, provide instructions for FA staff, and replace control panel switches.

How do NS-series PTs work?

NS-series PTs operate by displaying screens, reading data from the host, and sending data to the host. The data to be displayed on the screens (screen data) is created using the CX-Designer on a personal computer, and the data is stored in the PT. The required screen can be displayed by a command from the host or by operating the touch switches. NS-series PTs connect to the host using NT Links, Ethernet, or Controller Link communications to automatically read required data from the host. Data entered on the touch panel (button ON/OFF status, numerals, and character strings) can be sent to the host.

How do I create screen data?

The screen data displayed on PTs is created using CX-Designer on a personal computer. Screen data is transferred to the PT by connecting the PT and the personal computer using an RS-232C cable, a USB cable, or Ethernet. Screen data can also be transferred using Memory Cards.

What are some of the features of NS-series PTs?

NS-series PTs have a slim body, a structure suitable for FA environments, and two standard-feature ports for serial communications.

Slim Body
1. Greater sophistication and reduced body thickness (panel depth 40 mm max.). When mounted to a panel of the recommended thickness (1.6 to 4.8 mm).
2. Communications cable connectors housed inside Unit to eliminate protruding connectors.
Structure Suitable for FA Environments
1. Uses backlight with twice the life of previous OMRON PTs. Return the PT to your nearest OMRON service center for replacement (at user expense).
2. IP65F or NEMA4 equivalent watertight construction. May not be applicable in environments with long-term exposure to oil.
Two Standard-feature Ports for Serial Communications, Ports A and B, Enabling Connection to Both CX-Designer and the Host
1. Communications with the host via the other port are possible while still connected to CX-Designer.
2. Bar code data can be read from a bar code reader via the other port while communicating with the host.

What kind of Ethernet communications are possible with the host?

Ethernet communications with the host are possible for certain models. Ethernet/IP communications with the host are also possible with for certain models. The CPU Units available with tag message communications through Ethernet/IP and the corresponding project versions are as follows:

Version 8.0 or higher: CJ2H-CPU@@-EIP, CJ2M-CPU3@
Version 8.5 or higher: NJ501-@@@@
Version 8.6 or higher: NJ101-@@@@, NJ301-@@@@
Version 8.9 or higher: NX701-@@@@
Version 8.93 or higher: NX1P2-@@@@
Version 8.96 or higher: NX102-@@@@

How do I enable Controller Link communications with a host?

Installing a Controller Link Interface Unit enables using a Controller Link Network to send and receive large data packets flexibly and easily among OMRON PLCs and IBM PC/AT or compatible computers. The Controller Link Interface Unit is supported by the NS15, NS12, and NS10 only.

How do I enable the display of video images?

Installing a Video Input Unit enables displaying images from a video camera or Vision Sensor.

What are some of the models’ different screen sizes?

The NS15, NS12, NS10, NS8, and NS5 have different screen sizes. Also, some models support only serial communications while others also support communications via the Ethernet.

What are the main functions of the NS-series PTs?

The NS-series PTs have the following main functions:

Output Functions: Buzzer
Communications Functions: Host Communications
Display Functions
Input Functions
System Functions

How is the buzzer controlled?

The buzzer in the PT can be controlled.

What communications methods are available for host communications?

Any of five communications methods can be used: 1:1 NT Links, 1:N NT Links (standard or high speed), Ethernet, EtherNet/IP, or Controller Link. Host data can be read and displayed, and data can be input and sent to the host for buttons, numeral display and input objects, and character display and input objects.

What are the display functions of NS-series PTs?

NS-series PTs offer a variety of display functions including:

Screen Displays: Large, high-resolution screen with many graphic functions.
Characters: Display characters at various sizes. Characters can be flashed or character colors can be changed.
Fixed Objects: Lines, polylines, rectangles, polygons, circles, oval, arcs, and sectors can be displayed. Objects can be filled in various colors and flashed.
Internal Memory Data: The contents of registers in internal memory ($B, $W, $HB, $HW, $SB, and $SW) can be displayed.
Graphs: Bar graphs, analog meters, broken-line graphs, and trend (data logging) graphs are supported.
Lamps: Lamps controlled by the host can be lit or flashed. Different graphics can be used for lit and not lit status.
Alarms/Events: Host bit status can be used to automatically display messages and related information (e.g., time stamps). Alarms and events can be displayed one line at a time, in lists, or in histories.

What input functions are available?

NS-series PTs offer a variety of input functions including:

Inputting via Touch Switches: Buttons can be displayed easy input by touching the screen. Input functions include sending data to the host and switching the display screen.
Pop-up Windows: Windows that overlap the current screen can be opened, closed, and moved. Various objects can be registered for pop-up windows, and up to three pop-up windows can be displayed at the same time. Accessing the required windows when needed enables more effective use of screens.
Numeral/Character String Input: Touch switches can be used to input numerals and character strings. The input data can be sent to the host, and inputs can also be prohibited using controls from the host.
Bar Code Reader Inputs: Data read from bar code readers can be input to character string display and input objects.
Control Flags: Allocating host addresses to control bits enables controlling display of functional objects and enabling or disabling input functions from the host.

What are the system functions of the NS-series PTs?

NS-series PTs have a variety of system functions including:

System Menu: System setting and maintenance are performed from the system menu displayed on the screen.
Creating Screen Data: The CX-Designer running on a personal computer is used to create screen data and record it in memory built into the PT. Screen data can also be saved on Memory Cards in the PT.
Screen Saver: A screen saver increases the life of the backlight.
Built-in Clock: The built-in clock enables displaying dates and times.
Device Monitor Function: When connected to a PLC via a 1:1 NT Link, 1:N NT Link, or Ethernet, the PLC’s operating mode can be changed, words in the PLC can be read or written, error information can be written, etc.
Data Transfers: Screen data and system programs can be transferred by the Transfer Data function on the CX-Designer or by using Memory Cards. Data can also be transferred to the PT through a PLC and ladder program data, for example, can be transferred through a PT to a PLC.
Operation Logging and Alarm/Event History: A history can be kept of screen switches, functional object operation, and macro execution. The times and frequency that specific addresses turn ON can also be kept in a history.
Data Logging for Trend Graphs and Background Execution: The contents of addresses displayed for trend graphs can be logged, even while the graph is not being displayed (background execution).
Macros: Calculations data can be set as screen data to perform calculations at specific times during PT operation. Calculations include arithmetic, bit operations, logic operations, and comparisons. Various commands are also provided, e.g., to move objects or pop-up windows, manipulate character strings, etc.
Starting External Applications: Ladder monitor or other applications can be started from the system menu.
Printing: Screens can be printed out on a printer connected with a USB cable.
Programming Console Function: The PT can perform Programming Console functions by placing a Memory Card containing a program into the PT.
NS Switch Box: The comments of a specified PLC address can be displayed and data at the address can be monitored or changed.

What can be displayed on one screen?

A variety of elements can be displayed on one screen, including character strings, numerals, graphs, lamps, and buttons. The screen data displayed on NS-series PTs is created using CX-Designer.

What is a fixed object?

A fixed object is merely graphic data displayed on the screen. Unlike functional objects, fixed objects cannot exchange data with the host, execute operations, or change display attributes (except for flickering). There are seven types of fixed objects: Lines, circles/ovals, arcs, sectors, polylines, polygons, and rectangles.

What kinds of buttons can be registered to the screens?

Button can be registered to the screens as required. There are three types of buttons: ON/OFF buttons, word buttons, and command buttons.

What functions can be executed by touching the buttons on the screen?

The following functions can be executed by touching the buttons on the screen:

Turn bits ON or OFF (ON/OFF buttons)
Write numerals to words (word buttons)
Switch the displayed screen (command buttons)
Transfer numeral or character string data (command buttons)
Open, close, or move pop-up screens (command buttons)
Display the System Menu (command buttons)
Stop the buzzer (command buttons)

Can buttons be lit depending on the status of the allocated address?

Yes, buttons can be lit depending on the status of the allocated address. Also, inputs from the host can be controlled (enabled or disabled) by allocating the address of a control flag.

What display shapes are available for buttons?

There are three display shapes for buttons: Rectangle, select shape (ON/OFF buttons and word buttons), and circle (for ON/OFF buttons only). When the select shape option is used, the display shape is specified for the ON and OFF status of the allocated address.

What kinds of button labels are there?

There are two types of button labels: Fixed string display and ON/OFF switch display (for ON/OFF buttons only). In addition, the label can be displayed on multiple lines.

What types of lamps change the display status depending on the status of the allocated address?

There are two types of functional objects, bit lamps and word lamps, that change the display status depending on the status of the allocated address. The color and shape of the lamps can be changed depending on the ON/OFF status of bits for bit lamps or the contents of words for word lamps. Fixed character strings can be displayed as lamp labels. In addition, multiple lines can be displayed.

What kind of information can be displayed and inputted using Numeral Display and Input?

Numerals stored at the allocated address can be displayed and data can be input to the allocated address. Four different data formats can be displayed as required, including decimal and hexadecimal, and data can be stored as required in any of eleven data formats, including signed integers and BCD. Host values can be converted and displayed at a specified scale or displayed with units, such as mm or g. Also, inputs from the host can be controlled (enabled or disabled) by assigning the address of a control flag.

What kind of information can be displayed and inputted using String Display and Input?

Character string data stored at allocated addresses can be displayed and can be input to the address. Bar code data can be read using a bar code reader. Also, inputs from the host can be controlled (enabled or disabled) by allocating the address of a control flag.

How do Thumbwheel Switches work?

The numerical contents of the allocated address can be input by incrementing or decrementing the numeral using the + and – buttons for each digit. Also, inputs from the host can be controlled (enabled or disabled) by allocating the address of a control flag.

How do List Selections work?

Allocated addresses or character string data stored in text files can be displayed in a list and specific character strings can be specified from the list. Also, inputs from the host can be controlled (enabled or disabled) by allocating the allocated address of a control flag.

What methods are available for changing displayed characters for Text?

The following three methods are available for changing displayed characters:

Indirect Specification From a Text File: A list of character strings to be displayed can be stored in a text file and any character string in the text file can be specified for display.
Indirect Specification From a Character String Table: Any character string can be specified for display from preset character strings in a character string table.
Message Indicator Function: Character strings and background colors to be displayed can be registered for each status number and any registered status can be specified for display.

What are Bitmaps?

Bitmaps are functional objects that display bitmap files or JPEG files. Complex pictures or photographic images that cannot be drawn can be displayed on the screen. The display can also switch among different images depending on the contents of the specified address.

What are Level Meters?

Level Meters are used to display the current value of the allocated address by coloring the specified range. The display direction (up, down, left, or right), different color for each specified range, and whether or not scaling will be used can be set.

What do Analog Meters display?

An analog meter displays the current value for the allocated address by coloring regions or by means of a needle. The shape can be selected from a quarter circle, semi-circle, and full circle. The display direction (up, down, left, or right), incremental direction for the meter (clockwise or anti-clockwise), and whether or not scaling will be used can be set.

What do Broken-line Graphs display?

Broken-line graphs display the present values for multiple consecutive allocated addresses on one graph. Up to 256 line graphs can be displayed in one broken-line graph display region.

What is the function of Data Log Graphs?

The data log function saves changes over time in the contents of the allocated address. The saved data can be displayed for each data logging group. Data can be read (sampled) even if the data log graph is not displayed.

What do the Alarms and Events function do?

The alarm/event function reports alarms based on changes in bit status. There are two functional objects: Alarm/event displays and alarm/event summary and history. Alarm/event display objects display a pre-registered message and the date and time of the alarm or event when the monitored bit turns ON. Either one message or multiple messages (using the flowing string function) can be displayed. The alarm/event summary and history functional object displays a list of messages. The display order can be switched between displaying in order of occurrence, order of frequency, and by alarm level. Also, the history and data to be displayed when an alarm is generated can be selected.

What does the System Clock display?

The system clock displays the current date and time. The date and time can also be changed.

What are Data Blocks?

Data blocks (recipes) enable reading/writing values and character strings from/to memory areas, such as those in a PLC. Data blocks can be used to easily change the setup of the system. Create the data in a CSV file and store it in the PT beforehand. This data can be changed while operating the PT. Using data blocks, users do not need to save data in the PLC beforehand, so that the memory of the PLC can be saved and the ladder program can be reduced. Data blocks also have the following features:

Data in CSV format can be edited and managed on a computer.
Data can be edited on the PT.
Data can be written to a Memory Card.
Data from read from a Memory Card.
Process values and character strings can be handled.
Maximum number of rows: 1,000. Maximum number of columns: 500. Data blocks with both 1,000 rows and 500 columns, however, cannot be set.

What do Video Displays do?

Installing a Video Input Unit on certain PT models enables displaying images output from video devices, such as video cameras or Vision Sensors, to be displayed on the PT. Up to four video devices can be connected to the PT. There are two input methods: NTSC and PAL.

What does Consecutive Line Drawing do?

Polylines can be drawn by using the contents of communications addresses as coordinates of the vertex points. These shapes differ from regular polylines because the shapes can be changed actively.

What are Multifunction Objects?

Multifunction Objects are functional objects that can execute multiple functions in order with a one-touch operation. The set functions are executed one after the other when the Multifunction Object is pressed or the value at a specified address changes. Up to 32 functions can be set for each execution condition. The Multifunction Object function enables operations that were performed using a combination of macros and multiple functional objects to be performed in one operation. Safety functions can be set as an execution condition for when the Multifunction Object is pressed, e.g., Double Press, ON Delay, OFF Delay, and Prohibit Simultaneous Press.

What is Contents Display?

Contents Display is a functional object that switches character string and image file display according to its status. Character string displays and image files are indicated by the term “contents” and settings for switching display is referred to as the settings for switching contents. The character string and image combinations and the communications address for switching display for each status (i.e., each contents number) are made in the settings for switching contents. Contents display switches the displayed character string/images according to the specified communications address. The contents display can also be switched in connection with any alarms/events that occur or are cleared.

How do I register the host and access required data?

With NS-series PTs, data required for display can be accessed and the words and bits where the entered data will be stored can be allocated to any area in the PLC. The allocated words and bits are read from and written to directly, the display status changed for the objects on the PT screen, and the PT status controlled or reported. Communications with multiple PLCs are also possible with NS-series PTs. Host names are registered for the connected PLCs and any area in the PLC can be accessed by specifying the host name and address. Connect to the host using one of the following methods:

1:1 NT Link
1:N NT Links (standard, high speed)
Ethernet
Controller Link (When Controller Link Interface Unit is installed.)
Host Link
Temperature Controller Connection
Memory Link
Connection with PLCs and other devices from other manufacturers
EtherNet/IP

Up to 48 registrations are possible for hosts.

What devices support FINS messages?

Hosts connected on the Ethernet can communicate with devices that support FINS (Factory Interface Network Service) messages. FINS is a standard OMRON communications service. NS-series PTs can read and write data, word contents, and bit status from supported PLC Ethernet Units without having to be concerned about protocols. The following PLCs can be connected using Ethernet:

CS1G/CS1H-E(V1), CS1G/CS1H-H, CVM1/CV, CJ1G, CJ1G-H/CJ1H-H, CJ1M, CP1H, CP1L, CP2E, CJ2H, and CJ2M.

What is the Controller Link?

The Controller Link is an FA network that can send and receive large data packets among OMRON PLCs and IBM PC/AT or compatible computers. The Controller Link supports data links that enable data sharing and a message service that enables sending and receiving data when required. The following PLCs can be connected using Controller Link:

CS1G/CS1H-E(V1), CS1G/CS1H-H, CVM1/CV, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z), and CVM1(-V2), CQM1, CJ1G, CJ1G-H/ CJ1H-H, CJ1M, CJ2H, and CJ2M.

What is the NT Link protocol?

The NT Link protocol was specially designed to enable high-speed communications with OMRON PLCs. The following PLCs can be connected using NT Links.

CPM1A, CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1, CQM1H, C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE-E/-ZE, CS1G/CS1H-E(V1), CS1G/CS1H-H, CVM1/CV (V1 or later), CJ1G, CJ1G-H/ CJ1H-H, CJ1M, CP1H, CP1L, CP1E, CP2E, CJ2H, and CJ2M

In addition to the 1:1 NT Links, where one PT serial port is connected to one PLC, NS-series PTs can also use the 1:N NT Links, where up to eight PTs are connected to one PLC. The following PLCs can be connected using a 1:N NT Links.

CQM1H, C200HX/HG/HE-E/-ZE, CS1G/CS1H-E(V1), CS1G/CS1H-H, CJ1G, CJ1G-H/ CJ1H-H, CJ1M, CP1H, CP1L, CP1E, CP2E, CJ2H, and CJ2M

NS-series PTs also support a high-speed 1:N NT Link that allows faster communications. The following PLCs can be connected using a high-speed 1:N NT Links.

CS1G/CS1H (V1 or later), CS1G/CS1H-H, CJ1G, CJ1G-H/ CJ1H-H, CJ1M, CP1H, CP1L, CP1E, CP2E, CJ2H, and CJ2M.

What are some of the features of NT Links?

NT Links have the following features:

NT Links facilitate high-speed communications with PLCs. The high-speed 1:N NT Link, which enables even faster communications, is also supported.
Data can be written to PLC memory areas in bit units. This allows other bits in the word to which a touch switch has been allocated to be used for another applications, such as lamp allocations. However, data is written in word units only in the DM and EM Areas, so other bits in the word to which touch switches are allocated cannot be used for other applications in these memory areas.
NS-series PTs can be connected without switching PLC operating modes.
Up to eight PTs can be connected to one PLC port when 1:N NT Links are used and all ports can be used simultaneously. Up to eight ports can be used simultaneously for high-speed 1:N NT Links also. Normal 1:N NT Links and high-speed 1:N NT Links cannot, however, both be used on the same PLC port.
If a Communications Board is mounted in the CPU Unit option slot on a C200HX/HG/HE-E/-ZE PLC, up to three standard 1:N NT Link systems (up to 24 PTs) can be connected. Only standard 1:N NT Link connections can be made.
If a Serial Communications Board is mounted in the CPU Unit Inner Board slot on CQM1H PLCs, up to two standard 1:N NT Link systems (up to 16 PTs) can be connected. Only standard 1:N NT Link connections can be made.
If a Serial Communications Board is mounted to the CPU Unit Inner Board slot or a Serial Communications Unit is mounted to the Backplane of a CS1G/H or CS1G/H PLC, multiple standard or high-speed 1:N NT Link systems can be connected.
If the PLC supports the device monitor function, the PLC operating mode can be switched from the PT and the present values of words can be displayed or changed.

What is the Host Link method?

The Host Link method uses a 1:1 connection between the host and a PT to read and display word and bit data from the host. Many PLC models can be connected using Host Link. The following PLCs can be connected to NS-series PTs using Host Link. The PLCs are connected via their built-in serial port or a Host Link Unit supported by the PLC.

C Series: C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z), CQM1, CQM1H, CPM2A/CPM2C, CPM1/CPM1A, C500, C1000H, and C2000H
CV Series: CV500, CV1000, CV2000, and CVM1
CS/CJ Series: CS1G/CS1H, CS1G-H/CS1H-H, CJ1G, CJ1G-H/CJ1H-H, CJ1M, CP1H, CP1L, CJ2H, and CJ2M

What is EtherNet/IP?

EtherNet/IP is an industrial multivendor network protocol that uses Ethernet. The specification is an open standard managed by the ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendors Association) as is DeviceNet, and it is used for a variety of industrial devices. With NS-series PTs, communications can be performed with CS/CJ-series EtherNet/IP Units and CJ2H-CPU@@-EIP, CJ2M-CPU3@, NJ@01-@@@@, NX@0@-@@@@, or NX1P2-@@@@ Units with a built-in EtherNet/IP port. Also, it is possible to perform tag message communications when using a CPU Unit with a built-in EtherNet/IP port. These CPU Units contain a tag name server, so if tag names and an address table are stored in advance in the CPU Unit, it is possible to perform access from the NS-series PT using only the tag names.

What is PT memory made up of?

PT memory is made up of internal memory and system memory.

What is the internal memory in the PT used for?

The internal memory in the PT can be read and written by the user. Internal memory can be allocated as required for settings, such as the addresses for functional objects. The internal memory is divided into four sections:

Memory	Contents
$B	Bit Memory. Bit memory is used for I/O flags and signal information. Up to 32 Kbits (32,768 bits).
$W	Word Memory. Word memory is used to store numeral and character string data. Each word contains
	16 bits, but consecutive words can be used as required for character strings and 32-bit data. Up to
	32 Kwords (32,768 words).
$HB	Internal Holding Bit Memory. Internal Holding Bit Memory is used for I/O flags and signal
	information. Up to 8 Kbits (8,192 bits) can be used. Values are held even when the power supply to
	the PT is turned OFF.
$HW	Internal Holding Word Memory. Internal Holding Word Memory is used to store numeral and
	character string data. Each word contains 16 bits, and consecutive words can be used as required
	for character strings and 32-bit data. Up to 8 words (8,192 words) can be used. Values are held
	even when the power supply to the PT is turned OFF.

What is System Memory used for?

System memory is used to change information between the host and the PT, such as controlling the PT and notifying the host of PT status. The system memory is divided into two sections:

Memory	Contents
$SB	System Bit Memory. The system bit memory contains 64 bits with predefined functions.
$SW	System Word Memory. The system word memory contains 41 words with predefined functions.

What are the $SB and $SW addresses?

The functions for each $SB and $SW address are outlined on the following tables.

$SB Address	Operation	Classification
0	Operation Signal (Pulse). Repeatedly turns ON and OFF during PT operation.	NS status notification
1	Operation Signal (Always ON). Always ON during operation.	NS status notification
2	Screen Switch Strobe ON: Switches screen, OFF: System turns OFF automatically after screen switched.	NS status notification
3	System Menu Change Prohibit (ON: Prohibited, OFF: Enabled)	NS status control
4	Battery Low	NS status notification
5	Numeral and Character Input Detection ON: Inputting, OFF: Not inputting	NS status notification
6	Backlight Brightness Adjustment (High) (Adjusted when ON.)	NS status control
7	Backlight Brightness Adjustment (Middle) (Adjusted when ON.)	NS status control
8	Backlight Brightness Adjustment (Low) (Adjusted when ON.)	NS status control
9	Backlight Control (Screen Saver Start/Cancel)	NS status control
10	Backlight Flash Control ON: Flash, OFF: Lit	NS status control
11	Backlight Status ON: Not lit, OFF: Lit	NS status notification
12	Continuous Buzzer (ON: Buzzer ON, OFF: Buzzer OFF)	NS status control
13	Short Intermittent Buzzer (ON: Buzzer ON, OFF: Buzzer OFF)	NS status control
14	Long Intermittent Buzzer (ON: Buzzer ON, OFF: Buzzer OFF)	NS status control
15	Notification/Control of Video	NS status notification and
		control
16	Port A NT Link Priority Registration (for 1:N)	NS status control
17	Port B NT Link Priority Registration (for 1:N)	NS status control
18	Ten Key Pad Display with Temporary Input	NS status control
19	Input Disable (ON: Disabled, OFF: Enabled) To clear input disable, touch the screen and enter the password for the password level set under $SW13 in the dialog box that will be displayed prompting password input.	NS status control
20	Contrast Adjustment (+10 levels) (NS5 only)	NS status control
21	Contrast Adjustment (+1 level) (NS5 only)	NS status control
22	Contrast Adjustment (−1 level) (NS5 only)	NS status control
23	Contrast Adjustment (−10 levels) (NS5 only)	NS status control
24	Video Capture	NS status notification and
		control
25	Start Printing/Capture Screen	NS status control
26	Stop Printing	NS status control
27

What are the contents of project configuration data?

Project configuration data is created in units called “projects,” which include:

Project
Screen
Sheets
Functional Objects/Fixed Objects
Table
Frame
Background color
Text file
CX-Designer PT

What does a “project” include?

A project includes all data such as screen data and settings files.

How many screens can be created in each project?

A screen number is allocated to each screen and up to 4,000 screens can be created in each project.

What are sheets?

Sheets are screens that can be displayed in layers on normal screens and are useful when the same images are displayed on more than one screen. Up to 32 sheets can be created in each project.

What are functional objects?

Functional objects include buttons, lamps, numeral display and input objects, and string display and input objects. Various screens can be created by setting the properties for each functional object in the dialog boxes. Up to 1,024 functional objects can be used in one screen.

What are fixed objects?

Fixed objects are unlike functional objects in that they do not have monitor or input functions. Although fixed objects can be set to flicker, they are otherwise displayed in a constant state. There are seven types of fixed objects:

Lines
Circles/ovals
Arcs
Sectors
Polylines
Polygons
Rectangles

Up to 2,048 fixed objects can be used in one screen.

What is the table function?

The table function combines multiple functional objects into a single table format. Up to 256 functional objects can be combined into one table.

What are frames?

A frame object enables creating areas on a screen so that only part of the screen can be switched to another page. Frames consist of more than one page, and the displayed contents of the functional objects created on each page can be switched using the page switching function of the frame.

Up to 256 frame pages can be created for each frame.
Up to 256 functional objects can be used on each frame page.
Up to 10 frames can be created for each screen.

What is a background?

A background is a graphic screen that is displayed as the background of another screen. Note: Backgrounds cannot be set for sheets.

What are text files used for?

Text files are used to browse character stings and screen file names displayed by list selection objects, text objects, and bitmap objects.

What are the flicker settings?

The flicker settings make fixed and functional objects flicker at specified intervals. Ten flicker types can be registered for each screen. For fixed objects, a selection can be made from three prepared flicker types.

What is the password setting function?

This function asks for a password to be entered when functional objects are manipulated.

A password of up to 16 characters can be set.
Up to 5 passwords can be set for one project.

What are data log settings?

Data log settings are used to register changes over time to the contents of an address.

Settings can be made for 100 groups, including the log timing.
Up to 16 addresses can be set for one group.
Up to 50 addresses can be set for constant logging.

What is the group specification function?

This function performs mutually exclusive operations when buttons are pressed. If the same group number is set to multiple buttons, this function ensures that only one button can be turned ON. Groups 1 to 16 can be selected for one screen. The group specification function is used with ON/OFF buttons.

What is the numeral unit and scale setting function?

This function facilitates unit name display and scale conversion display for numeral display objects. Up to 1,000 numeral unit and scale settings can be made for one project.

What are dialog settings?

This function displays a confirmation message when data is written to functional objects. Any confirmation message can be set. Up to 200 write confirmation messages can be set for one project.

What is the alarm and event setting function?

This function always monitors signals registered as alarms or events and records any value change (e.g., from OFF to ON.) The registered data can be displayed simply in the alarm and event objects or can be displayed in a list. Up to 5,000 alarms and events can be registered for one project.

What does the Data Block setting function do?

This function writes and reads preset data to a PLC.

What is the broken-line graph group setting function?

This function registers a communications address to be displayed in the broken-line graph. When a broken-line graph group has been set, the new graph can be displayed over the existing graph display.

Up to 16 groups can be registered.
Up to 256 communications addresses can be set in each group.

What does the symbol table function do?

This function manages the variables that are registered in a project. Variables can be registered, changed, and deleted.

What does the String Table Setting function do?

This function manages character strings used in projects.

Character strings registered in the string table can be used by more than one functional object.
Up to 10,000 character strings can be registered for each project.

What does the function for switching contents do?

This function manages character strings and image files (called “contents”) to be displayed.

Registered contents can be displayed using the Contents Display.
Up to 10,000 contents can be registered for each screen.

What does the operation log record?

The operation log records the following operations:

Operations with functional objects
Operations that switch screens
Operations that execute macros
Operations that turning ON and OFF communications addresses (used to record the operations of external devices.)

How many characters can be in an operation log message?

A message of up to 32 characters can be set for operations with functional objects and communications addresses.

How many communication addresses can be set for one project in the operation log?

Up to 16 communications addresses can be set for one project.

What does the Device Data Transfer Settings function do?

This function transfers data from transfer sources to transfer destinations when specified conditions are met.

What does the NJ-series Troubleshooter do?

It monitors error status and other status in the Controller.

What is the maximum amount of functional objects, graphs, frames, and tables that can be placed on one screen?

With product data versions earlier than 8.1, a total of 1,024 functional objects, graphs, frames, and tables can be placed on one screen.

Note:

A total of up to 1,024 functional objects, frames, and tables can be placed in one screen.
Up to 2,048 graphic displays can be placed in one screen.

What are project properties?

Project properties are properties for the project currently being edited.

What are the items that can be set using the project properties function?

The following items can be set using this function:

Title
Switch label
Macro
Language selection
Pop-up menu
Macro option
Input option
Input Status Color
Data format

Can project properties be changed?

Yes, project properties can be changed at any time while screen data is being created.

How can I change the project properties?

Follow these steps:

Select PT – Project Properties.
The Project Properties Dialog Box will be displayed.
Make the settings and then click the OK Button.

How do I set a title in the Project Properties Dialog Box?

Select the Title Tab and set a title up to 64 characters.

How do I set switching labels in the Project Properties Dialog Box?

Select the Switch Label Tab.
Make the switch label settings.

What are the contents of the Switch Label Tab?

Number of labels: Set how many labels can be switched (1 to 16).
Switch No.: Set the label number.
Label name: Set the name for each label number (up to 15 characters).
Initial label: Set the label number to show on the screen after power to the PT is turned ON. The default setting is 0.

How do I set macros in the Project Properties Dialog Box?

Select the Macro Tab.
Set the macros to be used for the project. Refer to Section 1 Outline of Macro Function in the Macro Reference.

What are the contents of the Macro Tab?

Project: Specify whether to execute the macro when loading a project. Click the Edit Macro Button to perform programming.
Alarm/Event: Specify whether to execute the macro when an alarm/event occurs or when an alarm/event is canceled. Click the Edit Macro Button to perform programming.
When changing value: Specify whether to execute the macro when a specified address (bit) is turned ON/OFF or when the value in a specified address (word) changes. For details on setting methods, refer to System Settings and Project Properties in the CX-Designer Online Help.

How do I set the language in the Project Properties Dialog Box?

Click the Select Language Tab.
Select the system language for the PT.

Where is the system language displayed?

The system language will be displayed on the PT for system menus, keypads, messages, dialog boxes, etc.

How do I set the pop-up menu in the Project Properties Dialog Box?

Click the Pop-up Menu Tab.
Make the settings for the pop-up menu used to set word button, command button, string display, and string input objects.

How do I set the Macro Option in the Project Properties Dialog Box?

Click the Macro Option Tab.
Select the option to recognize “\n” in character strings as the line feed code and to display multiple-line messages when using the message box macro (MSGBOX).

How do I set the input options in the Project Properties Dialog Box?

Click the Input Options Tab.
Set whether to display the present value when entering values in numeral display and input objects, or whether to clear the present value and enter the new value. Also set whether to enable inputting data from barcodes while the input pad is being used.

How do I set the input status color in the Project Properties Dialog Box?

Click the Input Status Color Tab.
Set the text and input status background colors when inputting numerals or character strings in numeral display and input objects, string display and input objects, and temporary input objects.

How do I set the data format in the Project Properties Dialog Box?

Click the Data Format Tab.
Select either BCD or binary as the data format when specifying the line numbers for indirectly specified files.

How many display colors can be used in the NS Series displays?

Up to 256 colors can be used in NS Series displays (16-grayscale monochrome display for the NS5-MQ).

How many colors can be displayed by BMP and JPEG images?

BMP and JPEG images can be displayed with up to 32,000 colors (16 grayscales for the NS5-MQ).

Where do I select the color to be displayed?

Select the color to be displayed from the Color Setting Dialog Box displayed when creating screens using CX-Designer.

Is there an alternative way to specify display colors?

Yes, an alternative indirect method for specifying display colors is to change the display color based on the contents of a set address.

What happens to BMP and JPEG files created with more than 32,000 colors?

BMP and JPEG files created with more than 32,000 colors will be reduced to 32,000 colors for display.

How do I indirectly specify the display color?

Set a color code of between 0 and FF at the communications address. If a value other than 0 to FF is set at the address, the display color will be undefined.

What are the display characteristics of the NS5-MQ@@-V2?

The NS5-MQ@@-V2 features 16-grayscale monochrome display. All display colors are converted to 16 grayscale levels. Even BMP, JPEG, and other color image data is internally converted by the NS5-MQ and displayed in 16 grayscale levels.

How will screen data for the NS5-MQ@@-V2 be displayed?

Although screen data for the NS5-MQ@@-V2 is displayed in 16 grayscale levels on the CX-Designer displays and the NS5-MQ@@-V2 screen, the data will be displayed in color if it is converted to data for a PT model with color displays on the CX-Designer or transferred to a PT with a color display screen. The color codes that are used when creating the screen data for the NS5-MQ@@-V2 will be displayed for screen data and the image colors will be used for BMP and JPEG data.

How is screen data created for PTs with color displays handled?

All screen data created for PTs with color displays will be displayed in 16 grayscale levels on the CX-Designer if the screen data is converted for the NS5-MQ@@-V2 or it is transferred to the NS5-MQ@@-V2.

What is a through display?

If layers of objects are displayed, the background color for the object on top will normally overwrite the object underneath and the bottom object will no longer be visible. However, some objects can be set so that the background will not be filled. If the object is set for no tiling, the background of the object will not have a color and other objects under the background or the screen background color will show through.

What objects can be set for no tiling?

Labels, numeral display and input objects, string display and input objects, list selection objects, thumbwheel switches, broken-line graphs, alarm/event displays, alarm/event summary & histories, dates, times, data log graphs, rectangles, circle/ovals, polygons, and sector can be set for no tiling.

How do I set the screen background colors?

The background color for each screen can be set under Background Color in the screen attributes. The screen attributes are set using CX-Designer as properties for each screen.

Can I set character colors?

Yes, the color of the characters themselves can also be set. The character color is set as one of the properties when setting the labels for each object using CX-Designer. Character colors can also be specified indirectly.

What are the screen configurations for the NS15, NS12, NS10, NS8, and NS5?

NS5: 320 dots horizontal and 240 dots vertical
NS10 and NS8: 640 dots horizontal and 480 dots vertical
NS12: 800 dots horizontal and 600 dots vertical
NS15: 1024 dots horizontal and 768 dots vertical

How is each point on the screen specified?

Each point on the screen is specified using X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) coordinates. The origin of the coordinates (0,0) is the upper left corner.

How are NS-series screens categorized and controlled?

NS-series screens are categorized and controlled using screen numbers.

What are screen numbers used for?

Screen numbers are used to specify the display screen when the PT is started or when switching the displayed screen.

How many screens can be set for NS-series PTs?

Except for the System Menu Screen for which specific functions have been set, up to 4,000 screens can be set for NS-series PTs. Any number between 0 and 3,999 can be set for these screens.

How many sheets can be registered for layered display on normal screens?

Up to 32 sheets can be registered for layered display on normal screens. Any number between 0 and 31 can be set for these sheets.

How is the screen number specified?

When PT screens are created using the CX-Designer, the screen number is specified and the objects to be displayed are registered.

What two screen types are available?

The following two screen types are available:

User screens
Sheets

What are user screens?

User screens are used to create normal screens.

What are the types of user screens?

There are two types of user screens:

Normal screens: Basic screens displayed during PT operation.
Pop-up screens: Pop-up screens that can be displayed layered on top of base screens.

What are sheets?

Sheets are screens used when the same images are to be displayed on more than one screen. They are used in layers on normal screens.

What is a frame?

A frame allows you to create areas on a screen so that only part of the screen can be switched to another page. Objects can be created on each page of the frames in the screen.

What are normal screens?

Normal screens are basic screens displayed during PT operation. Any functional objects or fixed objects can be created for normal screens.

Up to 4,000 screens can be created for each project and any number between 0 and 3,999 can be allocated to the screens.

What are pop-up screens?

Only one normal screen at a time can be displayed during PT operation, but pop-up screens can be layered on top of normal screens. Pop-up screens are created the same way as normal screens. These pop-up screens can be used to display user keypads or help screens.

Up to three pop-up screens can be opened at a time.

How are pop-up screens created?

Pop-up screens are created the same way as normal screens. After a screen is created, specify under the screen properties whether it will be a normal screen or pop-up screen. Note: Screen number 0, however, cannot be set as a pop-up screen.

What objects cannot be created on pop-up screens?

Data Block Tables and Video Displays cannot be created on pop-up screens.

What are sheets?

Sheets are screens that can be displayed in layers on standard screens. If a functional object, such as screen switching buttons or date display, is used in multiple screens, the functional object can be registered to a sheet. By then setting which sheet is applicable to which screen, the functional object can be used on all applicable screens.

How many sheets can be created for each project?

Up to 32 sheets can be created for each project. Up to 1,024 functional objects can be created in one sheet, the same as for normal screens.

How many sheets can be applied over one user screen?

Up to 10 sheets can be applied over one user screen.

What happens if the position of functional objects for the normal screen and the sheets overlaps?

If multiple sheets are applied to a normal screen and if the position of the functional objects for the normal screen and the sheets overlaps, the standard screen objects will be displayed on top. The sheet objects will be displayed in order, with the object with the highest screen number on top.

What objects cannot be created on sheets?

Video Displays and Data Block Tables cannot be created on sheets.

What are frames?

A frame object enables creating areas on a screen so that only part of the screen can be switched to another page. Frames consist of more than one page based on the user settings and the displayed contents of the functional objects configuring each page can be switched based on PT or PLC status.

Frames can contain fixed objects, functional objects, and tables.
Created frames registered in a library can be easily reused at many different locations or on different screens.

What happens if frames are switched frequently?

If frames are switched frequently, the display update may take some time and communications may be delayed. Care must be taken because this means that sometimes data will not be logged or the momentary ON/OFF buttons may not operate normally.

What should you make sure of when creating frames?

Make sure the functional objects in the frame do not protrude from the frame. If the objects do protrude from the frame when it is created, they will be displayed incorrectly outside the frame.

What are the frame creation limitations?

Up to 10 frames can be created within one screen.
Up to 256 functional objects can be created in one frame page. The total number of functional objects that can be created in one screen, including the functional objects on each frame page and the functional objects outside frames, is 1,024.
Video Displays and Data Block Tables cannot be created in frames.

What functional objects can be used?

The following functional objects can be used:

Icon	Name	Function
![ON/OFF Button Icon]	ON/OFF Button	Controls the ON/OFF status of the specified write address. The action type can be selected from momentary, alternate, SET, or RESET.
![Word Button Icon]	Word Button	Sets numeric data at the specified address. The contents can also be incremented and decremented.
![Command Button Icon]	Command Button	Performs special processing, such as switching screens, controlling pop-up screen and Video display, etc.
![Bit Lamp Icon]	Bit Lamp	Turns ON and OFF according to the ON/OFF status of the specified address.
![Word Lamp Icon]	Word Lamp	Lights in 10 steps according to the contents of the specified address (0 to 9).
![Multifunction Object Icon]	Multifunction Object	Executes multiple functions at the same time when the object is pressed or the value at a specified address changes.
![Text Icon]	Text	Displays the registered character string.
![Numeral Display & Input Icon]	Numeral Display & Input	Numerically displays the word data from the specified address and input data from a tenkey pad.
![String Display & Input Icon]	String Display & Input	Displays the character string from the word data from the specified address and input data from a keyboard.
![List Selection Icon]	List Selection	Displays the registered character strings in a list for selection.
![Thumbwheel Switch Icon]	Thumbwheel Switch	Numerically displays the word data from the specified address and increment and decrement the data when increment/decrement buttons are pressed.
![Analogue Meter Icon]	Analogue Meter	Displays graphs in three colors in circles, semi-circles, or quarter circles for the word data at the specified addresses.
![Level Meter Icon]	Level Meter	Displays levels in three colors for the word data at the specified address.
![Broken-line Graph Icon]	Broken-line Graph	Displays broken-line graphs for the word data at the specified addresses.
![Bitmap Icon]	Bitmap	Displays screen data. Image data in BMP and JPEG format can be displayed.
![Video Display Icon]	Video Display	Displays pictures imported from video devices, such as a video camera or Vision Sensor.
![Alarm/Event Display Icon]	Alarm/Event Display	Displays alarms or events that have occurred in order of priority.
![Alarm/Event Summary History Icon]	Alarm/Event Summary History	Displays a list of alarms/events and the history.
![Date Icon]	Date	Displays and sets a date.
![Time Icon]	Time	Displays and sets a time.
![Temporary Input Icon]	Temporary Input	Provides a temporary display of an input value or character string.
![Data Log Graph Icon]	Data Log Graph	Displays trend graphs for the word data at the specified addresses.
![Data Block Table Icon]	Data Block Table	Writes to and reads from PLC preset recipe data, such as instructions for manufacturing process.
![Consecutive Line Drawing Icon]	Consecutive Line Drawing	Displays a polyline shape that can be changed with the contents of communications addresses.
![Contents Display Icon]	Contents Display	Displays the contents (character strings or image files) according to the contents switching setting.

What frames and tables are available?

The following frames and tables are available:

Icon	Name	Contents
![Frame Icon]	Frame	Switches the specified rectangle area (frame).
![Table Icon]	Table	Displays functional objects in a table format.

What fixed objects can be used?

The following fixed objects can be used:

Icon	Name	Contents
![Rectangle Icon]	Rectangle	Displays a rectangle.
![Circle/Oval Icon]	Circle/Oval	Displays a circle or ellipse.
![Line Icon]	Line	Displays a line or arrow.
![Polyline Icon]	Polyline	Displays a polyline.
![Polygon Icon]	Polygon	Displays a polygon.
![Sector Icon]	Sector	Displays a sector.
![Arc Icon]	Arc	Displays an arc.

Can I read and write to the internal memory?

Yes, the internal memory in the PT can be read and written by the user. Internal memory can be allocated as required for settings, such as the communications addresses of functional objects.

How is the internal memory divided?

The internal memory is divided into bit and word sections.

What is bit memory?

The bit memory in a PT is indicated by $B.

Up to 32,768 bits can be used.
Addresses from $B0 to $B32767 can be read and written by the user.
Bit memory is used for signal information that indicate ON/OFF status for functional object addresses and control flags.

What is word memory?

The word memory in PTs is indicated by $W.

Up to 32,768 words can be used.
Addresses from $W0 to $W32767 can be read and written by the user.
Word memory is used to store all numeral and character string data, including data for allocated addresses for functional objects.
Each word contains 16 bits, but consecutive words can be used as required for character strings and 32-bit data.

Can internal memory be read and written directly from the host?

No.

What is the internal memory size for $B and $W?

The internal memory size is fixed at 32,768 bits for $B and 32,768 words for $W.

What is internal holding memory?

The memory in PTs that holds values even when the power to the PT is turned OFF is indicated by $HB and $HW.

$HB holds 8,192 bits and $HW holds 8,192 words.
Any address from $HB0 to $HB8191 or $HW0 to $HW8191 can be read and written by the user.
$HB is used for signal information that indicates ON/OFF status for functional object addresses and control flags.
$HW is used to store numeral and character string data, including data for allocated addresses for functional objects.
Each word in $HW contains 16 bits, but consecutive words can be used as required for character strings and 32-bit data.

What is system memory used for?

System memory is used for exchanging information between the host and the PT, such as for controlling the PT and notifying the host of PT status.

How is the system memory divided?

The system memory is divided into bit and word sections.

What is system bit memory?

System bit memory ($SB) is used to exchange information between the host and the PT, such as for controlling the PT and notifying the host of PT status, in bit units. The system bit memory contains 64 bits with predefined functions.

How is system memory allocated?

System memory is allocated to PLC areas as shown below. Set the allocation addresses for the system memory on the Initial Tab Page of the CX-Designer. Select PT – System Settings to access the Initial Tab Page.

Wd m: $SB0 to $SB15 Wd m+1: $SB16 to $SB31 Wd m+2: $SB32 to $SB47 Wd m+3: $SB48 to $SB63

What should I do when allocating a tag?

Set a BOOL variable with 64 elements.

What is the function of the RUN Signal (Pulse) ($SB0)?

$SB0 notifies the host memory and PT memory that the PT is operating (normal operation on normal screens.) During operation, $SB0 alternates between ON and OFF according to the interval set for RUN signals (pulses). $SB0 will not turn OFF and ON if no communications between $SB0 and the allocated address is set in the CX-Designer system settings.

What happens to the RUN Signal (Pulse) notification in the various statuses?

Status	RUN Signal Status	Operation When Status Cleared
System Menu (including device monitor)	Stops notification.	Restarts notification.
Transfer	Stops notification.	Restarts notification.
Error	Stops notification.	Restarts notification.
Start	Stops notification.	Starts notification.
Screen Saver	Continues to alternate ON/OFF notification.	Continues to alternate ON/OFF notification.

What is the function of the RUN Signal (Always ON) ($SB1)?

$SB1 notifies the host memory and PT memory that the PT is operating (normal operation on normal screens.) During operation, $SB1 turns ON according to the interval set for RUN signals (pulses) in the $SB and $SW. $SB1 will not turn ON if no communications between $SB1 and the allocated address is set in the CX-Designer system settings.

What happens to the RUN Signal (Always ON) notification in the various statuses?

Status	RUN Signal Status	Operation When Status Cleared
System Menu (including device monitor)	Stops notification.	Restarts notification.
Transfer	Stops notification.	Restarts notification.
Error	Stops notification.	Restarts notification.
Start	Stops notification.	Starts notification.
Screen Saver	Continues to notify ON.	Continues to notify ON.

What happens if the status is changed to System Menu, transfer, or another status with the RUN Signal (Always ON) ($SB1) is active?

If the status is changed to System Menu, transfer, or another status, the notification will stop but OFF notification will not be made before the status change.

What programming recommendation is made regarding the RUN signal?

Include programming that regularly accesses the RUN signal and confirms that the PT is operating normally.

What is the function of the Screen Switch Strobe ($SB2)?

$SB2 is for notification of screen switching. Immediately after the screen is switched, $SB2 is turned ON the next time $SB/$SW is refreshed and then turned OFF at the following $SB/$SW refresh. Notification is made when the screen switches to a normal (base) screen.

When is $SB2 screen switch strobe notification provided?

Timing	Screen Switch Strobe Notification
From base screen to base screen	Yes
From non-base screen to base screen	No
Open, close, move pop-up screen	No
Move to System Menu	No
Move to transfer	No
Startup initial screen display	No
Move to screen saver	No
Frame switch	No
Screen switch failure (switched to non-existent screen)	No

Note: Applicable to System Menu, transfer, and screen saver.

What happens if no communications between $SB2 and the allocated address is set?

$SB2 will not turn OFF if no communications between $SB2 and the allocated address is set in the CX-Designer system settings.

What happens when switching to another base screen during the communications cycle after the initial display or end of screen switching?

The PT moves to the next screen switch processing without making screen switch strobe notification for the first screen.

What happens when switching to another base screen during the $SB/$SW refresh cycle (n times) after the initial display or start screen switching?

The PT moves to the next screen switch processing without turning OFF screen switch strobe notification for the first screen.

How do I directly input an address in the Address Setting Dialog Box?

Select the Input Direct Address Tab from the Switch Input Options. Specify the host, area, and address (“number”).

What are indexes?

An index is an address whose contents are used to determine the address that is referenced.

Can indexes be set in the Address Setting Dialog Box?

No. Enter an index directly into the input area.

How do I enter the numeric address for communications addresses of other company’s devices when they are sometimes input using hexadecimal numbers?

Input a 0 between the area name and the address number.

What is an example of the correct and incorrect input for a Mitsubishi A-series Controller?

X0A3: Correct input
XA3: Incorrect input

Is it necessary to input a 0 between the area name and address number if hexadecimal is not used to input the address number?

No.

What determines which areas and other settings are displayed?

The device set as the host.

How do I input a symbol in the Address Setting Dialog Box?

Select the Symbol Programming Tab from the Switch Input Options. Input the symbol name in the Name or Address Field. It is possible to input just the symbol name, without inputting the area and address.

What happens when a symbol name that is not registered in the symbol table has been set in the Name or Address Field?

Select the area name in the Area field.

What happens when a symbol name that is registered in the symbol table has been set in the Name or Address Field?

That symbol’s area name will be displayed in the Area field.

What happens when a symbol name that is not registered in the symbol table has been set in the Name or Address Field?

Set the address in the Address field.

What happens when a symbol name that is registered in the symbol table has been set in the Name or Address Field?

That symbol’s address name will be displayed in the Address field.

What happens when a symbol name that is not registered in the symbol table has been set in the Name or Address Field?

Set an I/O comment in the I/O Comment field.

What happens when a symbol name that is registered in the symbol table has been set in the Name or Address Field?

That symbol’s I/O comment will be displayed in the I/O Comment field.

How do I input a communications address when specifying an address?

Input the address in the Name or Address Field.

How do I select a registered symbol in the Address Setting Dialog Box?

Select the List Tab from the Switch Options. Select the desired symbol from the list of symbols registered in the symbol table.

In CX-Designer, what can be set as the data referenced by a functional object instead of a directly specified host address or internal memory address?

A symbol.

How can program maintenance be simplified?

By converting the program to text so that the text indicates the contents of each program address.

What is a more effective technique than text comments for explaining the contents of a program address?

Specifying label names and symbol names in the address.

How do variable names help when the I/O configuration is changed?

They allow you to make global changes to the entire project just by changing the address associated with the symbol name so it isn’t necessary to change the addresses in the program individually.

Where are symbols registered?

In the symbol table.

What are the restrictions that apply to symbol names?

A number cannot be used for the symbol’s first character.
The following symbols cannot be used: [!] [”] [$] [%] [&] [’] [(] [)] [-] [=] [^] [~] [|] [@] [`] [[] [{] [;] [+] [:] [*] [] [}] [,] [<] [.] [>] [/] [?]
If the project version is lower than version 8.0, [#] and [] cannot be used in addition to the symbols given above.
Spaces cannot be used.
Addresses cannot be used as names.
The maximum length of the symbol name is 64 characters.

What is the format for tags?

Host name:Tag name

How are tags specified for array variables?

Host name:Tag name[index]

Can bit positions be specified using tags?

No.

Are structured variables supported?

No.

What methods can be used to create tags?

Copying from the CX-Programmer’s Symbol Table or the Sysmac Studio’s Variable Table
Registering new tags in the symbol table
Inputting new tags for a communications address in the Address Setting Dialog Box
Directly inputting new tags for a communications address

What is recommended when using tags?

That they have the data types and names as the corresponding network variable in the host (PLC), and to copy the tags from the symbol table of the CX-Programmer or the variable table of the Sysmac Studio.

What versions of CX-Designer and CX-Programmer are required to copy data structures?

CX-Designer version 3.2 or higher and CX-Programmer version 9.2 or higher.

What versions of Sysmac Studio support structures?

All versions.

How do I copy tags from the CX-Programmer’s symbol tables?

Select the network variable to be reused in the CX-Programmer’s symbol table.
Drag and drop the tag to the CX-Designer’s symbol table to copy it.
A dialog box for selecting the host for which the tag will be set will be displayed. Select a host that can use tags, and then click the OK Button.
The tag will be registered in the symbol table of the CX-Designer.

How do I copy tags (i.e., network variables) from a variable table in the Sysmac Studio?

Select Tool – Export Global Variables – CX-Designer.
Paste the variable in the symbol table in the CX-Designer.
A dialog box will appear to select the host to set for the variable. Select a host for the tag and click the OK Button.
The tag will be registered in the symbol table of the CX-Designer.

How do I register new tags in the symbol table?

Click the Add Button in the CX-Designer’s Symbol Table Dialog Box.
The Address Setting Dialog Box will be displayed. Click the Input Tag Button.
Make the settings, and then click the OK Button.

What are the restrictions that apply to tag names?

The following characters cannot be used: [!], ["], [$], [%], [&], [‘], [(], [)], [=], [-], [~], [^], [¦], [`], [@], [{}, [[], [+], [;], [*], [:], []], [}], [<], [,], [>], [.], [?], [/], space
Set tag names so that they do not exceed the following character string lengths:
- CJ2 CPU Unit: 48 bytes for UTF-8 characters
- NJ/NX-series CPU Unit: 255 bytes for UTF-8 characters
Only an alphabetic character or an underscore can be set as the first character of the tag name.
[.] can be used with project version 8.4 or higher.

What should be done when setting a new tag?

Use the same settings as those used in the host (PLC) tag.

What should be done if there is no tag in the host?

Copy the tag that you created from the CX-Designer’s symbol table to the CX-Programmer’s symbol table or the Sysmac Studio’s variable table (structure variables cannot be copied).

Where is the tag link type that was set with the CX-Programmer or Sysmac Studio displayed?

In the Tag Link Type Field.

Can the tag link type be changed with the CX-Designer?

No.

What will always be displayed if a new tag is created with the CX-Designer?

Network Variable.

How do I input a new tag in the Address Setting Dialog Box?

Click the Set Button by the Communications Address Field.
The Address Setting Dialog Box will be displayed.
Click the Input Tag Button.

How do I directly input a new tag into a Communications Address Field?

Select Tools – Options.
The Option Dialog Box will be displayed.
Select the Treat As Tags When Inputting New Variable Names Option on the Edit/Disp Tab Page.
Click the OK Button.
Input the new tag in the Communications Address Field.

On what do the data types of tags that are created depend?

The settings for the communications address.

What is the storage type and data type set for a tag if the items that can be set are only to BOOL?

BOOL

What are the storage type and data type set for a tag if the storage type is SINT?

SINT

What are the storage type and data type set for a tag if the storage type is USINT?

USINT

What are the storage type and data type set for a tag if the storage type is INT?

INT

What are the storage type and data type set for a tag if the storage type is UINT?

UINT

What are the storage type and data type set for a tag if the storage type is DINT?

DINT

What are the storage type and data type set for a tag if the storage type is UDINT?

UDINT

What are the storage type and data type set for a tag if the storage type is LINT?

LINT

What are the storage type and data type set for a tag if the storage type is ULINT?

ULINT

What are the storage type and data type set for a tag if the storage type is REAL?

REAL

What are the storage type and data type set for a tag if the storage type is LREAL?

LREAL

What are the storage type and data type set for a tag if the storage type is BCD2 (1 word, unsigned)?

UINT_BCD

What are the storage type and data type set for a tag if the storage type is BCD2 (2 words, unsigned)?

UDINT_BCD

What are the storage type and data type set for a tag if the items are set together with the storage type?

CHANNEL

What are the storage type and data type set for a tag if the items are other storage types?

CHANNEL

What are the storage type and data type set for a tag if the items are other items?

CHANNEL

What system version is required to set the storage type as SINT, USINT, LINT, ULINT, or LREAL?

System version 8.4 or higher.

With system version 8.5 or higher, what functional objects can have a storage type of LINT or LREAL?

Numeral Display and Input objects.

In what cases will tags be treated as direct addresses or variable names of direct addresses even if the Treat As Tags When Inputting New Variable Names Option is selected in the Option Dialog Box?

Direct addresses are input.
A host that cannot use tags is specified.

Can direct addresses that have been registered in symbol tables (including symbols without addresses) be converted to tags?

Yes.

How do I convert direct addresses to tags?

Select the direct address (symbol) to be converted in the symbol table.
Double-click the address to display the Address Setting Dialog Box. Click the Input Tag Button.
The host setting, data type, and I/O comment will be inherited if the host supports tags. If the host does not support tags, the host will be changed to a host that supports tags. If the host before conversion does not support tags, it will be changed to support them. The host setting before the change will be inherited if the host that was set before the change supports tags.
Adjust the settings as required, and then click the OK Button.
The address will be converted to a tag.

Can tags be converted to direct addresses?

Yes.

What are the seven types of fixed objects that can be used?

Rectangle
Circle/Oval
Line
Polyline
Polygon
Sector
Arc

What does a Rectangle fixed object do?

Draws a rectangle.

What does a Circle/Oval fixed object do?

Draws an inscribed circle or oval within a specified rectangle.

What does a Line fixed object do?

Draws a straight line or arrow.

What does a Polyline fixed object do?

Draws a series of specified lines.

What does a Polygon fixed object do?

Draws a polygon from a series of specified lines.

What does a Sector fixed object do?

Draws a circle and then a sector from a specified angle in that circle.

What does an Arc fixed object do?

Draws a circle and then an arc from a specified angle in that circle.

Where are all display properties for fixed objects, such as color and size, set?

In the Fixed Object Property Setting Dialog Box.

How do I select the object for which the properties are to be set?

Select the object for which the properties are to be set and then select PT – Functional Object Properties or click the right mouse button and select Properties from the pop-up menu.

What are the fixed object properties that can be set?

Line: Set the line color and type.
Size/position: Set the position and size of the fixed object (displayed for fixed objects other than lines).
Start/end: Set the start and end points for lines (displayed only for lines).
Flicker: Set the flicker display.
Tiling: Set the display color for the fixed object (displayed for fixed objects other than lines, polylines, and arcs).
Frame/shade/chamfer: Set frames, shading, colors, and beveling for these (displayed for fixed objects other than lines, polylines, and arcs).

What settings are available for line properties?

No line: Select whether or not to use frame lines.
Color: Set the line color.
Thickness: Set the line thickness.
Line style: Set the line type. Select from the 5 types of lines shown in the list: Solid lines, Broken lines, Dotted lines, 1-dot chain lines, 2-dot chain lines
Arrow: Select one of the following: No arrow, Start arrow, End arrow, Both ends arrow

Can arrows be set for any type of line?

No, arrows can only be set for straight lines.

What do the size and position properties set?

The size and display position of the fixed object.

What are the size and position settings?

Size: Specify the width and height of the fixed object in dot units.
From Top Left of Screen/Frame: Specify the position (upper left X and Y coordinates) of the object from the upper left of the screen or frame. (X coordinate: 0 to 2,559; Y coordinate: 0 to 1,919)

How should the position be set for size and position properties?

So that the object is not outside the screen or frame area.

What do the start and end properties set?

The display position for the line.

What are the start and end settings?

Start point (from the top left of the screen or frame): Specify the position for the start point of the line in bit units, from the top left of the screen or frame. (X coordinate: 0 to 2,560; Y coordinate: 0 to 1,920)
End point (from the top left of the screen or frame): Specify the position for the end point of the line in bit units, from the top left of the screen or frame. (X coordinate: 0 to 2,560; Y coordinate: 0 to 1,920)

What precaution should be taken when setting the start and end points of lines within frames?

Care must be taken so that the line is not positioned outside the frame area. Be careful when setting the position so that the line is not outside the screen.

On what tab page are settings made to make fixed objects flicker (flash)?

The Flicker Tab Page.

What are the flicker settings?

Set the flicker setting for each object: Alternately displays the fixed object display color and its inverse color. The following three flicker speed options can be selected: Low flicker, Middle flicker, High flicker.
Use the flicker common setting: Used to select the flicker method from the Flicker No. options set under PT – Flicker – Flicker Settings.

How can I set an object so it does not flicker?

Select None under Flicker Speed or Flicker No.

What will happen if inverse flicker is selected under the flicker common settings?

The whole fixed object will be displayed in inverse colors, including straight lines, continuous straight lines, and arc, regardless of the flicker range setting.

What will happen if inverse flicker is set for a 3-dot frame or 5-dot frame under the flicker common settings?

The outside of the fixed object (screen background) of polygons and sectors will also be displayed in inverse colors.

What do tiling properties set?

The color for the fixed object.

What are the tiling settings?

No Tiling: Select whether or not to tile the object.
Color: Set the object color.

What do frame, shade, and beveling properties specify?

The frame, shading color, size, and bevel setting for the three-dimensional display of fixed objects.

What are the three types of fixed objects?

No frame or shade
Frame
Shade

How are shade properties set?

Select the Shade Option.
Set the color with the Color setting.
Set the depth under Depth.
Select one of the four shade direction types: Top Left, Top Right, Bottom Left, or Bottom Right

How are three-dimensional frame properties set?

Select the Frame Option.
Set the color with the Color (Left/Top) and Color (Right/Bottom) settings.
The size of the frame is set under Frame Size.
When drawing a frame border, select the Draw Border Option to draw the frame border and specify the color with the Border Color setting.

What chamfer types can be selected?

None: No bevel
Radius of curve: Rounds the corners using the bevel size setting for the radius.
Cut: Cuts off an isosceles triangle from each corner based on the bevel size setting.

What settings can be made for polygons and sectors?

Only shade settings.

What does the library contain?

Pieces of data that registered functional and/or fixed objects created on CX-Designer.

What determines how many library items can be registered?

The computer’s available free disk space.

What can not be registered in the library?

Video Displays and Data Block Tables.

What function is similar to the Library?

The Palette function.

What does the Palette function provide?

Preset screens that can be used as templates.

What functional objects should not be overlapped when creating a screen?

ON/OFF Buttons
Alarm/Event display objects
Word Buttons
Alarm/Event summary and history objects
Command Buttons
Data log graphs
Numeral display and input objects
Broken-line graphs
String display and input objects
Date objects
Thumbwheel switches
Time objects
List selection objects
Data Block Table
Multifunction Object
Contents display

What can be done if addresses are set in the properties of functional objects?

The colors can be made to change depending on the status read via communications, and the host can be notified when objects are pressed.

What addresses are set on the General Tab Page for an ON/OFF Button?

The write address when an ON/OFF Button is pressed, as well as display address 1 and display address 2.

What do address settings determine?

The addresses that can be set for a functional object and depend on the functional object and the setting items.

What types of addresses can be set to functional objects, such as ON/OFF buttons or lamps, that read the ON/OFF status of addresses?

Only bits.

What does index setting allow?

If an index is specified for a particular address, the address can be automatically changed to a value to which the index value has been added.

How many index types can be set?

Ten, I0 to I9.

What do the index types correspond to?

$SW27 to $SW36.

How are indexes specified?

By adding the index (between I0 and I9) at the end of the address.

Can an index be entered from the Address Setting Dialog Box?

No.

What will happen if the address exceeds the setting range as a result of the index being specified?

The address will be invalid, and communications will not be processed.

What will happen if the Use as default option is selected when an address is set to a functional object?

That setting will be enabled even for other projects.

What happens if the Use as default option is selected and there is a host with the same host name?

That host name will be applied.

What happens if the Use as default option is selected and there is no host with the same host name?

The default value ($B0, $W0) will be used.

Can indexes be set for tags?

No.

What is set in the Address Setting Dialog Box?

The host name, area type, and address.

What should be selected from the list of host names when specifying the PT internal memory?

PT memory.

What do the area types that can be selected depend on?

The model of host that is registered.

What menu option should be selected to display the Comm. Setting Dialog Box and set the host name?

PT – Communication Setting.

What does selecting PT memory under Host Name allow?

Access to the internal PT memory.

On what does the area type that can be selected depend?

The selected host name.

What are the internal memory areas that can be specified if PT memory is selected under Host name?

$B: Internal bit memory
$W: Internal word memory
$SB: System bit memory
$SW: System word memory
$HB: Internal holding bit memory
$HW: Internal holding word memory

How are addresses input?

Use the numeric buttons 0 to 9 below the input field to enter the address.

What does the CLR Button do?

Clears the address.

What does the BS Button do?

Deletes the last character in the address.

What types of addresses can be set for functional objects such as ON/OFF buttons or lamps that read the ON/OFF status of specified address bits?

Only bits.

Can indexes be set in the Address Setting Dialog Box?

No, enter indexes directly.

For what objects can scale conversions be included in the display?

Numeral display objects and thumbwheel switches.

For what object can the unit be displayed?

Numeral display objects.

On what tab page are the unit and scale display settings made?

The General Tab Page of the Functional Object Properties Dialog Box.

What happens if Indirect specification of unit and scale No. is selected in the Functional Object Properties Dialog Box?

The contents at the address are taken as the unit and scale number, and the unit number is switched accordingly.

What does indirect specification allow?

The display unit or scale conversion coefficient can be switched from the host.

Is indirect specification possible for units and scales numbers for thumbwheel switches?

No.

What do unit and scale settings set?

The unit name and scale (magnification) combinations for the numerals to be displayed.

How do I set the unit and scale?

Click the Set Button in the Unit and Scale column on the General Tab Page in the Functional Object Property Dialog Box.

What is the maximum number of units-scale combinations that can be registered?

Up to 1,000.

What information is downloaded to the PT?

Only the set information.

How are units and scales edited?

Double-click each item in the Unit & Scale Setting Dialog Box.

What must the scale for a thumbwheel switch be set to?

A power of 10.

What must the offset for a thumbwheel switch be set to?

What might happen if values other than a power of 10 for the scale and 0 for the offset are set for a thumbwheel switch?

The thumbwheel switch may not operate properly.

What display and storage formats can be specified for functional objects that handle numeric values?

Decimal
- Byte: -128 to 127 (signed); 0 to 255 (unsigned)
- Word: -32,768 to 32,767 (signed); 0 to 65,535 (unsigned)
- 2-Word: -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 (signed); 0 to 4,294,967,295 (unsigned)
- 4-Word: -9,223,372,036,854,770,000 to 9,223,372,036,854,770,000 (signed); 0 to 18,446,744,073,709,500,000 (unsigned)
Hexadecimal
- Byte: 0 to FF (unsigned)
- Word: 0 to FFFF (unsigned)
- 2-Word: 0 to FFFFFFFF (unsigned)
Binary
- Byte: 0 to 11111111 (unsigned)
- Word: 0 to 1111111111111111 (unsigned)
- 2-Word: 0 to 11111111111111111111111111111111 (unsigned)
Octal
- Byte: 0 to 377 (unsigned)
- Word: 0 to 177777 (unsigned)
- 2-Word: 0 to 37777777777 (unsigned)

On what tab page are the display and storage formats for numerals set?

The General Tab Page.

What are BCD numerals?

Numerals with each digit of the decimal number displayed in 4-bit binary code.

What storage types cannot be selected when display formats other than decimal are selected?

Real number and BCD.

What storage types can be selected once decimal has been selected as the display type?

Real number or BCD.

What storage format is automatically set if, after decimal is selected as the display type and then real number or BCD is selected as the storage type, other display formats are selected?

UINT (1-word unsigned).

How is the SINT storage type stored?

As a 1-byte integer at the write destination address. (-128 to 127 in decimal)

What is the data format for SINT?

The most significant bit is treated as the sign. (0: Positive, 1: Negative)

How is the USINT storage type stored?

As a 1-byte integer at the write destination address (0 to 255 in decimal).

How is the INT storage type stored?

As a 2-byte integer at the write destination address. (-32,768 to 32,767 in decimal)

What is the data format for INT?

The most significant bit is treated as the sign. (0: Positive, 1: Negative)

How is the UINT storage type stored?

As a 2-byte integer at the write destination address (0 to 65,535 in decimal).

How is the DINT storage type stored?

As a 4-byte integer at the write destination address. (-2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 in decimal)

What is the data format for DINT?

The most significant bit is treated as the sign. (0: Positive, 1: Negative)

How is the UDINT storage type stored?

As a 4-byte integer at the write destination address (0 to 4,294,967,295 in decimal).

How is the LINT storage type stored?

As an 8-byte integer at the write destination address. (-9,223,372,036,854,770,000 to 9,223,372,036,854,770,000 in decimal)

What is the data format for LINT?

The most significant bit is treated as the sign. (0: Positive, 1: Negative)

How many effective digits does the NS-series PT provide?

How is the ULINT storage type stored?

As an 8-byte integer at the write destination address (0 to 18,446,744,073,709,500,000 in decimal).

What do the flicker settings do?

The flicker settings make functional objects flicker at specified intervals. Flicker settings can be made for each screen.

What are the details for Flicker Pattern?

When Normal is selected, flickering will be performed with the inverse of the display color. If Display ON and OFF Colors Alternately is selected, the ON and OFF colors of the object will be display alternately according to the flicker timing. This only applies to bit lamps.

What are the details for Flicker Timing?

Select Always to make the object flicker continuously. Select When address ON to make the object flicker while a specified address is ON. The object will not flicker, however, if the flicker control flag is disabled.

What is the Control flag for flickering?

Control flag: Enabled
- Flickering: Always – Flickers, When address ON – Flickers, When address OFF – Does not flicker.
Control flag: Disabled
- Flickering: Always – Does not flicker, When address ON – Does not flicker, When address OFF – Does not flicker.

What are the details for the different Flicker Settings?

Flicker No.: Set the flicker number between 1 and 10.
Flicker speed: Sets the flicker speed.
Flicker range: Select one of the following 5 of flicker ranges.
- Frame 1 (1 dot)
- Frame 2 (5 dots)
- All (A)
- All excluding border
Flicker color settings: Sets the flicker method and color for flicker.
- Show display color and inverse color alternately: Repeats alternate display of the display color and its inverse color.
- Show and hide alternately: Repeatedly alternates between showing and hiding display of the whole object or the label string.
- Specify display color: Repeats alternate display of the current display color and the specified color. The color for flicker can be specified as Text Color, Background Color, or Line Color. Select the checkbox under Specified Color for what color is to be changed (text, background, or line color) and specify the color.

What are the details of the Control flag for Flicker Color Setting?

When set to Enabled: The object flickers.
When set to Disabled: The object does not flicker.
When set to Indirect: Switches between enabled and disabled when the specified address turns ON and OFF. Only bits can be set for indirect.

At the slowest flicker speed, approximately how often will the object flicker?

At the slowest flicker speed, the object will flicker approximately every 2 seconds.

At the fastest flicker speed, approximately how often will the object flicker?

At the fastest speed, the object will flash approximately every 200 ms.

In what units can the flicker speed be set?

The flicker speed can be set in 200-ms units.

What will happen if the flicker settings are changed for a particular functional object?

If the flicker settings are changed for a particular functional object, the new settings will be reflected for all functional objects with the same flicker number in that screen.

What will happen if the control flag is set to Indirect?

If the control flag is set to Indirect, the display color will return to the original color when the set address turns OFF. For this reason, the whole screen is refreshed.

Will bit lamps flicker when set to Select Shape, even if Display ON and OFF Colors Alternately are selected in the flicker method settings?

No, they will not flicker.

Will flicker occur if all the checkboxes under Specify Color are deselected, even if Specify display color is selected under Flicker Color Settings?

No, it will not occur.

What should you do when specifying a color?

Always select the checkbox for the flicker target and specify the color.

How does the flicker action occur when Show Display Color and Inverse Color Alternately is selected?

The flicker action occurs at the specified flicker speed and in the specified flicker range.

What is the flicker action when All excluding border is selected under Flicker Range?

The flicker action is the same as for NS system versions 6.6 and lower.

How does the flicker action occur when Show and Hide Alternately is selected?

The flicker action occurs at the specified flicker speed.

What can be specified when Specify Display Color is selected?

The text color, background color, or line color can be specified.

How is the background displayed when Background color is specified?

The background excluding the frame is displayed in the specified color.

What flicker methods are supported by the different functional or fixed objects?

Functional/Fixed object	Show display color and inverse color alternately	Show and hide alternately	Specify display color
ON/OFF buttons	✓	×	Text color – ✓, Background color – ✓, Line color – ✓
Word buttons	✓	×	Text color – ✓, Background color – ✓, Line color – ✓
Command buttons	✓	×	Text color – ✓, Background color – ✓, Line color – ✓
Bit lamps	✓	×	Text color – ✓, Background color – ✓, Line color – ✓
Word lamps	✓	×	Text color – ✓, Background color – ✓, Line color – ✓
Labels	✓	Whole object – ✓, Label – ✓	Text color – ✓, Background color – ✓, Line color – ✓
Numeral display and input	×	×	Text color – ✓, Background color – ✓, Line color – ✓
String display and input	×	×	Text color – ✓, Background color – ✓, Line color – ✓
List Selection	×	×	Text color – ✓, Background color – ✓, Line color – ✓
Thumbwheel switch	×	×	Text color – ✓, Background color – ✓, Line color – ✓
Analog meter	×	×	Text color – ✓, Background color – ✓, Line color – ✓
Level meter	×	×	Text color – ✓, Background color – ✓, Line color – ✓
Broken-line graph	×	×	Text color – ✓, Background color – ✓, Line color – ✓
Bitmaps	×	×	Text color – ✓, Background color – ✓, Line color – ✓
Alarm/event display	See note 1.	See note 1.	×
Alarm/Event Summary/History	×	×	Text color – ✓, Background color – ✓, Line color – ✓
Date	×	×	Text color – ✓, Background color – ✓, Line color – ✓
Time	×	×	Text color – ✓, Background color – ✓, Line color – ✓
Data Log Graph	×	×	Text color – ✓, Background color – ✓, Line color – ✓
Video Display	–	–	–
Temporary Input	–	–	–
Continuous Line Drawings	–	–	–
Contents Display (for string display)	×	×	×
Contents Display (for image display)	×	×	Text color – ✓, Background color – ✓, Line color – ✓
Multifunction Object	See note 3.
Data Block Table	–	–	–
Rectangle	✓	×	Text color – ✓, Background color – ✓
Circle/Oval	✓	×	Text color – ✓, Background color – ✓
Straight Line	See note 2.	×	Text color – ✓
Continuous Straight Line	See note 2.	×	Text color – ✓
Polygon	✓	×	Text color – ✓, Background color – ✓
Sector	✓	×	Text color – ✓, Background color – ✓
Arc	See note 2.	×	Text color – ✓

Key: ✓: Flicker, ×: No flicker, -: Flicker function not supported

What are the notes for the table detailing supported flicker methods for functional and fixed objects?

Note 1: The object will not flicker if Flowing text is selected in the alarm/event display property settings.
Note 2: The whole object will flicker, regardless of the flicker range settings.
Note 3: The object will flicker only if the shape is set as a polygon or sector.

Will a functional object flicker if an unsupported flicker method is specified in the property settings for that object?

No, it will not flicker.

When can a confirmation message be set to be displayed?

A confirmation message can be set to be displayed when data is written using buttons and other functional objects that are manipulated. Any confirmation message can be set. The write settings are made on the Write Tab Page of the Functional Object Properties Dialog Box. For Multifunction Objects, make the setting on the General Tab Page.

What message will be displayed when using standard messages?

The standard message shown below will be displayed when using standard messages: “Do you want to write?” “Yes” “No”

What should you do if the message protrudes outside the screen when displayed on the PT?

Edit the message and insert a carriage return at an appropriate spot.

How are user-specified messages specified?

Any confirmation message can be specified. Select User specified message on the Write Tab Page and click the Edit message Button. The Dialog Setting Dialog Box will be displayed. Select a message from the list.

What are the details for the different settings in the Dialog Setting Dialog Box?

Switch: Switches labels.
Font: Displays the font name (fixed to Standard).
Clear: Clears the selected message.
Title: Changes the Message Dialog Box title (up to 64 characters).
Message: Changes the contents of the message (up to 256 characters). There are 4 icons available: STOP, QUESTION MARK, EXCLAMATION MARK, INFORMATION.
Focus: Changes the default focus position when the message is displayed. Select Yes to change the focus to Yes, and select No to change the focus to No.
CSV import: Imports a message from a CSV file.
CSV export: Exports a registered message to a CSV file.

What confirmation message will be displayed when the following settings are input? Title: System1 Message: Are you really sure to execute? Icon: QUESTION Gets focus in Test Mode.

The following confirmation message will be displayed: “System1” “Are you really sure to execute?” “No”

Are focus settings enabled in test mode?

Yes, they are enabled in test mode, but they are not displayed on the PT.

When are messages enabled?

Messages can also be set by selecting PT – Dialog Setting.

When are the CSV import and export functions useful?

The CSV import and export functions are useful when there are a lot of confirmation messages and you want to edit them efficiently.

What happens when you click the CSV Import or CSV Export Button at the bottom of the Dialog Setting Dialog Box?

A File Specification Dialog Box will be displayed. If importing from a CSV file, select the name of the file to be imported and press the Open Button. If exporting to a CSV file, enter the name of the file in the File name input field and click the Save Button. The output CSV file will be displayed in the following format. Display for Microsoft Excel

What do the icon and default focus settings mean?

Icon	Meaning	Focus	Meaning
STOP	Stop (X) symbol	Yes	Yes
EXCLAMATION	Exclamation mark	No	No
QUESTION	Question mark
INFORMATION	Information (i) symbol

Why is it useful that the set numerals and character strings can all be edited together?

The set numerals and character strings can be all edited together because the efficient editing functions of market software can be used. Once editing has been completed, import the file again to enable the settings.

When can a specified address be turned ON?

A specified address can be turned ON (1) whenever a button is pressed or a value is entered and written. Turn OFF the address from a PLC or other external device.

What host address should be set for the write address on the General Tab and the address set under Turn ON the specified address when the value is written (confirmed)?

Set the same host address.

What may happen if a different host is set?

The address set under Turn ON the specified address when the value is written (confirmed) may turn ON before the write address contents have been changed, depending on the communications timing.

What should you do when exporting data?

Specify the CSV file’s character code (multibyte code or Unicode).

What type of CSV files can be imported?

It is also possible to import CSV files that were exported from the CX-Designer.

How do you keep a history of functional object operations during PT operation?

Select Record Operation log to keep a history of functional object operations during PT operation.

How many characters should the message character strings added to the operation log be?

Set the message character strings added to the operation log to 32 characters or less for each label.

When can a password be set?

A password can be set for when entering data to functional objects during PT operation.

What are the two password functions?

Password function: The password must be input before an operation on a password-protected functional object.
Password function (with level function): The password must be input before an operation on a password-protected functional object. Once the password is input, all object operations allowed at that authentication level and lower levels can be performed until the authentication is cleared.

Why should you not set passwords for functional objects that control machine operation?

If a password is set for a button or other functional object, operation will not be possible until the password is input, delaying operation. Therefore, do not set passwords for functional objects that control machine operation.

When can an operation be performed on a functional object?

An operation can be performed on a functional object only if the password is at the protection level set for that functional object.

How often does the password have to be input for the Password Function?

The password must be input each time that an operation is performed on the functional object.

What happens when the correct password is input for the Password Function?

The functional object operation is enabled.

What happens when the incorrect password is input for the Password Function?

The functional object operation is disabled.

What happens when passwords with levels have been set?

A password will be required the first time a password-protected functional object is manipulated. Inputting the password set for the functional object will authenticate that password level, enabling manipulating functional objects in the same and lower levels. Functional objects with higher-level passwords cannot be manipulated.

What level is the lowest and what level is the highest?

Level 1 is the lowest level and level 5 is the highest level.

What happens when the Level 3 password is input (Level 3 authentication)?

Operations are enabled on functional objects at the authenticated level and lower levels. Operations are prohibited on functional objects at a higher authentication level.

How can authentication be canceled?

Authentication is canceled if the PT is restarted.
Authentication is canceled if the user presses a Command Button set to cancel authentication.
Authentication is canceled if a specified timeout time elapses without performing an operation.

Is the timeout monitor enabled or disabled in the following PT operating conditions?

Status	Timeout monitor
Displaying user screen	Enabled
Displaying screen saver	Enabled
Displaying system dialog	Disabled
Displaying transfer screen	Disabled
System menu screen	Disabled

What screen is displayed when the PT starts?

When the PT starts, it does not display the specified screen specified after authentication is canceled; it displays the initial screen specified on the System Setting Dialog Box’s Initial Tab Page.

When will the verification status be cleared?

The verification status will be cleared if any of the following functions are used:

Memory Card transfers
Device Monitor (NS15 only)
PLC data tracing
Ladder Monitor
C Programming Console
CS Programming Console

How can passwords with levels be used to prevent inappropriate operation?

The level authentication screen can be displayed as the startup screen. Command buttons on this screen can be used, for example, to provide separate authentication levels for operators vs. managers. The screen can be switched depending on the level that is authenticated.

How are passwords used with levels?

A level would be set for each command button, for example, level 1 for operators and level 5 for managers. All screens displayed after authentication (e.g., device operation monitoring screens and maintenance screens) would contain a command button to cancel authentication. The password settings would specify that the authentication screen be displayed when authentication is canceled.

Describe the steps of using passwords with levels.

An operator or manager would press the command button set for them on the authentication screen and then enter the password in the password input dialog box to authenticate the appropriate level.
If the level is authenticated, either the operator’s screen or the manager’s screen would be displayed. These screens would be user application screens for device operation monitoring, maintenance, etc.
When work was completed and the PT left, the command button to cancel authentication would be pressed, switching the display back to the authentication screen. It is possible to switch to any specified screen after authentication is canceled.

What is set on the Password Tab Page in the Password Setting Dialog Box?

Passwords and keyboard screens are set for levels 1 and 5. The password function with levels is enabled and the authentication screen is specified for display after authentication is canceled.

What is set on the Model Selection Tab Page in the Password Setting Dialog Box?

The passwords for levels 1 and 5 are set for command buttons to change the screen.

What does the Authentication screen do?

The Authentication screen authenticates level 1 when the Level 1 password is input, and authenticates level 5 when the Level 5 password is input.

What are the passwords for each level set to?

The set password is shared by all functional objects.

When will operation of functional objects with set passwords be permitted?

Operation of functional objects with set passwords will only be permitted if the password that matches the password character string for the specified level is entered when the operation is received by the object.

What can be specified from the pop-up window?

The password input keyboard can be specified from the pop-up window.

What does a user-created pop-up window allow?

With PT system version 8.2 or higher, a user-created pop-up window can be used as the keyboard screen for inputting the password character string. This allows the user to set the keyboard screens for inputting passwords.

What can be specified for the keyboard?

For each of the five password levels, the system keypad or a user-created pop-up window can be specified for the keyboard, and the pop-up window to be used as a user-created keyboard can be set.

What objects can be placed on the password input keyboard?

Only the following objects can be placed on the password input keyboard:

Command Buttons (Function selection: Key Button)
Temporary Inputs (Function selection: Temporary Input Field)
Label objects

How do you set a password?

To set a password, click the Set Password Button on the Password Tab Page from the functional object properties.

What are the details for setting a password?

Password: Set the password and keypad for each level from 1 to 5.
Function mode: Select the Password or Password (with level) Option.

How else can the Password Setting Dialog Box be displayed?

The Password Setting Dialog Box can also be displayed with the following operations:

Double-click Password in the Project Workspace Window’s Common Settings Tab Page.
Click the Set Password Button in the Password Tab Page of the functional object’s Property Dialog Box.

What are the details for the different settings for setting a Password?

Password: Set the password for each level (up to 16 alphanumeric characters).
Keypad: Select the standard system keypad or select specifying a pop-up window.
Specified screen No.: When specifying a pop-up window is selected, set the pop-up window to be opened for password input.

What is the maximum number of characters a password can be, and what type of characters can they include?

Passwords must be 16 characters maximum and can include only one-byte alphanumeric characters.

What happens if a functional object with a password set is pressed during PT operation?

A Password Dialog Box will be displayed. Press the input area to display the keyboard screen that has been set for that level. Use this keyboard to enter the password.

What are the details for the different settings in Function Mode?

Cancel authentication if no operation is done for a set period: If this check box is selected, authentication will be automatically cancelled if no screen operation is performed within the specified timeout time after level authentication.
Time-out Time: Sets the time until authentication is cancelled. Can be set from 1 to 60 (minutes).
Switch screen when canceling authentication: If this check box is selected, the screen will be switched to the screen specified when authentication is cancelled for a timeout or by a Command Button.
Screen Switch No.: Set the screen to switch to when authentication is cancelled.

What will happen if a pop-up window is used as the password keyboard?

The keyboard screen will be closed when the input is entered or cancelled, just as it is with the system keypad.

How can you close a pop-up window?

A button operation is required to close the pop-up window. Register a macro for a functional object and set it to close the pop-up window.

How can a pop-up window be closed using a Macro Setting?

A pop-up window can be closed by setting CLOSEPOPW(-1) in the Program Field. For details, refer to the NS series Macro Reference.

What do Control flags do?

Control flags control the input and display of functional objects. Control flags can be used for an interlock function and are used to enable display or enable input depending on the ON (1) or OFF(0) status of the address. The control flag settings are made on the Control Flag Tab Page of the Functional Object Properties Dialog Box.

What are the details for the settings on the Control Flag Tab Page?

Input: Sets whether or not input will be enabled for buttons and other functional objects. Switches between input enable and disable when the specified address turns ON and OFF, if Indirect is specified. Only bits can be set for indirect.
Display: Sets whether or not the functional object will be displayed. Switches between display and no display when the specified address turns ON and OFF, if Indirect is specified. Only bits can be set for indirect.
Action When Specifying Indirect: Sets the input timing for indirect address specifications.
- Enable Input When Address ON: Input will be enabled when the specified address is ON and disabled when it is OFF.
- Enable Input When Address OFF: Input will be enabled when the specified address is OFF and disabled when it is ON.
Action When Specifying Indirect: Sets the display timing for indirect address specifications.
- Display When Address ON: Display will be enabled when the specified address is ON and disabled when it is OFF.
- Display When Address OFF: Display will be enabled when the specified address is OFF and disabled when it is ON.

What happens if numeral display and input objects and string display and input objects are set to not display?

Input will be disabled regardless of the input enable/disable setting.

What happens if input is enabled for other functional objects that accept inputs, but the object is not displayed?

Input will be enabled. For example, if the ON/OFF button is set to input enable and no display, a transparent button can be created.

What does the macro function allow users to do?

The macro function allows users to create and execute simple programs. Arithmetic operations, discrimination between conditions, and other functions that are not supported by functional objects can be added by the user. This section describes how to set macro execution using the Functional Object Properties Dialog Box. For details, refer to NS-series Macro Reference.

What are the details of the Macro settings?

Macro execution condition: For functional objects with macro function, specifies whether or not the functional object will be executed for each condition.
Edit Macro: Click the Edit Macro Button to create a new macro or edit a macro.

What does the Size/Position (Extension Tab) do?

It displays and sets the size of the functional object and the position from the upper left of the screen (frame/table).

How is the size set?

Set the height and width of the functional object in dot units. The height can be set between 1 and 1,920, and the width between 1 and 2,560.

What is used as the origin when the size is changed?

The top left position of the functional object is used as the origin when the size is changed.

What may happen depending on the set size?

The object may protrude outside the screen or frame, depending on the set size. The section outside the screen or frame will not be displayed.

How is the position set?

Specify the horizontal position (X coordinate) and vertical position (Y coordinate) of the functional object from the top left of the screen or frame. The horizontal position can be set between 0 and 2,559 and the vertical position between 0 and 1,919. Set the horizontal and vertical positions in dot units.

How should the position be set?

Set the position so that the object is not outside the screen or frame area.

How can you perform an error check to check for functional objects outside the screen or frame area?

An error check can be performed to check for functional objects outside the screen or frame area. Refer to Validation in the CX-Designer Online Help for details on error checks.

How must the Video Display be positioned?

The Video Display must be positioned so that it is entirely on the screen. It cannot extend outside of the screen. Refer to 2-13-5 Video Display for details.

How can the input order that was set on the Keypad Tab Page of the Property Dialog Box for numeral input and display objects or string input and display objects be changed?

Select Change Input Order from the PT Menu.

What are the details of the settings for changing the input order?

Input Order List: Displays the current input order and object ID. The corners of objects selected in the list will flash on the project editing screen. They will not flash, however, if they are located on pages where the frames cannot be seen.
Up: Moves the input order of the selected object up one in the input order list.
Down: Moves the input order of the selected object down one in the input order list.
Set initial position of the focus when switching screen: Enables or disables the input order on the destination screen when switching screens.
Circulate: Select this check box to move the focus to the first object in the list after an input has been made for the last object in the list. This function will not work for objects that can be input when they are on sheets.

What does the string table function do?

The string table function manages character strings used in projects. Strings registered in the string table can be used by ON/OFF buttons, bit lamps, Multifunction Objects, labels, and alarm/event functions. Any changes to strings registered in the string table are automatically reflected in the functional objects.

What is the maximum number of strings that can be registered in a string table, and what is the maximum number of characters each string can be?

Up to a maximum of 10,000 strings can be registered in a string table and each string can be up to a maximum of 1,024 characters.

What is the maximum setting file size that can be registered for one project?

The maximum setting file size that can be registered for one project, however, is 5 MB. Do not set any value larger than this.

What is the setting file name?

The setting file name is txttable.cfg.

How can you check the size of the current setting file?

You can check the size of the current setting file by selecting Tools – Resource Report from the CX-Designer menus.

How can registered strings be changed as a group?

Registered strings can be changed as a group by importing/exporting CSV files. The string table can be exported as a CSV file, edited or translated, and then imported. All of the data in the edited CSV file can then be registered together in the string table.

What is the size of the settings file dependent on?

The size of the settings file depends on the number of registered characters and labels.

What is the guide for the file size, number of labels, and number of registered statuses?

File size	No. of labels	Number of registered statuses	No. of characters in each string
5.0 MB	1	10,000	256
4.9 MB	1	2,500	1,024
4.8 MB	2	10,000	120
4.7 MB	2	1,200	1,024
4.9 MB	16	10,000	10
4.7 MB	16	150	1,024

How do you register a string in a string table?

To register a string in a string table, select PT – String Table in the CX-Designer or click the Refer to the String Table Button in the functional object Property Dialog Box.

What does Contrast Adjustment do?

Adjusts the contrast, brightness, depth, and tone of the image.

What are the Contrast Setting items?

⋅10, ⋅1, +1, +10 (Adjustable in 64 steps.)

What are the Brightness Setting items?

⋅10, ⋅1, +1, +10 (Adjustable in 128 steps.)

What are the Depth Setting items?

⋅10, ⋅1, +1, +10 (Adjustable in 32 steps.)

What are the Tone Setting items?

⋅10, ⋅1, +1, +10 (Adjustable in 256 steps.)

When can Red, Green, and Blue be set?

These items can be set only when the NS-CA002 RGB/Video Input Unit is mounted.

What can be sent by pressing a button?

Various control signals can be sent to the OMRON Vision Sensor by pressing the button.

What does the Signal type do?

Set the signal type to send to the Vision Sensor.

What are the names and descriptions of the signal types?

Name	Description
ESC	Previous screen
TRIG	Execute measurement
ENT	Enter
UP	Move the cursor up or increase the set value by one.
DOWN	Move the cursor down or decrease the set value by one.
LEFT	Move the cursor left.
RIGHT	Move the cursor right.
SHIFT	Add the SHIFT signal. This signal does not function by itself. It changes the function of another signal.
F1 to F9	Refer to the Vision Sensor Console manual for details on the setting method.

How do you add the SHIFT signal?

To add the SHIFT signal, press another signal button while holding down the SHIFT button.

What is the valid SHIFT state?

There is only one SHIFT state held by the system. The last operation for the SHIFT state will be valid when multiple SHIFT buttons are arranged, pressed, or released.

Where should Vision Sensor Console Output buttons not be placed?

Do not place a Vision Sensor Console Output button on any of the four corners of the PT.

What happens when two of the four corners of the PT are pressed?

The screen switches to the system menu.

What happens if the SHIFT button and another button placed on any corner are pressed?

If the SHIFT button and another button placed on any corner are pressed at the same time or sequentially, the screen may switch to an unintended screen.

What does the Data Block Control – File – PLC function operate on?

Data blocks.

What happens when a button is pressed in the Data Block Control – File – PLC function?

CSV file data is transferred to the specified addresses in the PLC or the data from specified addresses in the PLC is transferred to the specified record in the CSV file.

What are the details of the settings for the Data Block Control – File – PLC function?

No.	Setting	Details
1	Control content	Specifies the control operation to be performed when the command button is pressed.
2	Data Block No.	Specifies the data block group number (1 to 100) for the control operation. The group number can be set indirectly through a communications address by selecting the Indirect Reference Option.
3	Record	Specifies the record number in the CSV file (0 to 999) to use in the control operation. The Record number can be set indirectly through a communications address by selecting the Indirect Reference Option.*
4	File Location	Specifies either the PT or a Memory Card as the location of the CSV file. The File Location can be set indirectly by selecting the Indirect Reference Option. If the specified address is 0, the PT will be used. If the specified address is 1, the Memory Card will be used.*
5	Record Method	If the Control Content Field is set to Write data from PLC Data Block to CSV file, the data at the specified record can be overwritten or it can be inserted at the specified record number. The Record Method can be set indirectly by selecting the Indirect Reference Option. If the specified address is 0, the data will be overwritten. If the specified address is 1, the data will be inserted.*
6	Execute the function when address changes to ON	If the option is selected, the specified control operation is performed when the specified address changes from OFF to ON while the command button is being displayed.

What does the control content “Read data from CSV file to PLC Data Block” do?

Transfers the data from the specified record in the CSV file to the PLC address specified in each field.

What does the control content “Write data from PLC Data Block to CSV file” do?

Transfers the data from the PLC address specified in each field to the specified record in the CSV file.

What does the control content “Delete record” do?

Deletes the data from the specified record in the CSV file.

What does the Data Block Control – File – NS, NS – PLC function operate on?

Data blocks.

What happens when a button is pressed in the Data Block Control – File – NS, NS – PLC function?

Data is read/written between the CSV file and the specified PT address or between the specified PT address and the specified PLC address.

What are the details of the settings for the Data Block Control – File – NS, NS – PLC function?

No.	Setting	Details
1	Control content	Specifies the control operation to be performed when the command button is pressed.
2	Data Block No.	Specifies the data block group number (1 to 100) for the control operation. The group number can be set indirectly through a communications address by selecting the Indirect Reference Option.*
3	Record	Specifies the record number in the CSV file (0 to 999) to use in the control operation. The Record number can be set indirectly through a communications address by selecting the Indirect Reference Option.*
4	File Location	Specifies either the PT or a Memory Card as the location of the CSV file. The File Location can be set indirectly by selecting the Indirect Reference Option. If the specified address is 0, the PT will be used. If the specified address is 1, the Memory Card will be used.*
5	Record Method	If the Control Content Field is set to Write data from NS PT Memory to CSV file, the data at the specified record can be overwritten or it can be inserted at the specified record number. The Record Method can be set indirectly by selecting the Indirect Reference Option. If the specified address is 0, the data will be overwritten. If the specified address is 1, the data will be inserted.*
6	Address	Specifies the PT communications address for reading/writing the PLC address specified in each field or reading/writing data for CSV file.
7	Record Label	Specifies whether to include the record label when reading and writing PT addresses.
8	Execute the function when address changes to ON	If the option is selected, the specified control operation is performed when the specified address changes from OFF to ON while the command button is being displayed.

What does the control content “Read data from CSV file to NS PT Memory” do?

Transfers the data from the specified record in the CSV file to the specified address in the PT.

What does the control content “Write data from NS PT Memory to CSV file” do?

Transfers one record of data from the specified address in the PT to the specified record in the CSV file.

What does the control content “Read data from NS PT Memory to PLC Data Block” do?

Transfers one record of data from the specified address in the PT to the PLC address specified in each field.

What does the control content “Write data from PLC Data Block to NS PT Memory” do?

Transfers the data from the PLC address specified in each field to the specified address in the PT.

What does the Data Block Control – Read Record Label function operate on?

Data blocks.

What happens when a button is pressed in the Data Block Control – Read Record Label function?

The record labels for the specified records in the CSV file are transferred to the specified addresses in the PT.

What are the details of the settings for the Data Block Control – Read Record Label function?

No.	Setting	Details
1	Data Block No.	Specifies the data block group number (1 to 100) to be controlled. The group number can be set indirectly through a communications address by selecting the Indirect Reference Option.
2	Record	Specifies the first record number (0 to 999) in the CSV file for which the record label is to be read. The Record number can be set indirectly through a communications address by selecting the Indirect Reference Option.*
3	No. of Record to be read	Specifies the number of record labels to read starting from the top record number.
4	Turn specified address ON when reading the final record	If this option is selected, the specified address will turn ON when the record label has been read for the last record number.
5	File Location	Specifies either the PT or a Memory Card as the location of the CSV file. The File Location can be set indirectly by selecting the Indirect Reference Option. If the specified address is 0, the PT will be used. If the specified address is 1, the Memory Card will be used.*
6	Address	Specifies the PT communications address to which to write the record labels.
7	Execute the function when address changes to ON	If the option is selected, the specified control operation is performed when the specified address changes from OFF to ON while the command button is being displayed.

What happens when the Authentication Cancellation command button is pressed?

The authentication will be canceled.

What happens if the button is pressed when the authentication has already been canceled?

No processing is performed.

What does the Color/Shape Tab Page specify?

The button color and shape.

How many button color options can be selected from?

256 options

What are the details of the settings for the Color/Shape Tab Page?

No.	Setting	Details
1	Normal color	Sets the button’s color.
2	Color when *pressed	Select the Specify Color when Pressed option and set the button’s color.*

What does clicking the Select Shape Button on the Specifying Shapes settings do?

Sets the button’s shape when it is pressed (Shape when Pressed) or the button’s normal shape (Normal Shape).

What can be set on the Label Tab Page?

A label for the button.

What can be specified on the Frame Tab Page?

The colors and sizes of the button frame to change the shape or color when the button is depressed or raised.

What flicker settings can be made on the Flicker Tab Page?

Flicker settings can be made to make the button flicker (flash).

What can you do using the Write Tab Page?

Use the Write Tab Page to display a confirmation display box before writing values to a write address. The confirmation message can be changed.

What can you do on the Password Tab Page?

Set a password for when buttons are pressed. Five passwords of up to 16 characters each can be set. One password can be requested for each object.

What do control flags do on the Control Flag Tab Page?

Control flags control the input and display of functional objects. Use control flags to enable display or input when the contents of an address turn ON or OFF.

What can be specified for Command Buttons on the Macro Tab Page?

Macros.

What triggers can macros be registered for?

Trigger	Details
Touch ON	Executes macro when the button is pressed.
Touch OFF	Executes macro when the button is released.

What can be displayed and set on the Size/Position Tab Page?

The functional object size and position.

What can be turned OFF on the Other (Extension Tab)?

The touch switch input sound for ON/OFF buttons can be individually turned OFF.

When will the touch switch input sound be turned OFF for all objects?

The touch switch input sound will be turned OFF for all objects (regardless of the individual settings) if the touch switch input sound (Key Press Sound) has been set to OFF in the PT’s System Menu or in the System Setting Window’s PT Tab Page in the CX-Designer.

What are Lamps?

Lamps are functional objects for which the display depends on the contents of the address on the host. There are bit lamps and word lamps.

What does the bit lamp display color depend on?

The ON/OFF status of the specified address.

How do you create a bit lamp?

Select Functional objects – Bit lamp or the icon in CX-Designer to create a bit lamp.

What can bit lamps be changed to?

Multifunction Objects

What can be done if a bit lamp is changed to a Multifunction Object?

If changed to a Multifunction Object, the lamp can be changed to a button or multiple functions can be executed at once when the button is pressed.

What settings can be found in the Functional Object Properties Dialog Box for bit lamps?

General: Sets the address and lamp shape.
Color/Shape: Sets the lamp display color and shape.
Label: Sets the label display.
Frame: Sets the lamp frame display.
Flicker: Sets the flicker display.
Control Flag: Sets display/no display of the functional object.
Macro: Sets macros to be executed.
Size/Position: Sets the object size and position.

When are the Flicker, Control Flag, Macro, and Size/Position tabs displayed?

When the Display Extension Tabs Option is selected.

What is set on the General Tab Page for bit lamps?

The lamp shape and address.

What are the details of the settings on the General Tab Page for bit lamps?

No.	Setting	Details
1	Object Comment	Sets an explanatory comment for the pasted object. (Up to 32 characters.)
2	Display Address	Sets the address referenced for lamp display directly or by using the Set Button. Only bits can be set.
3	Lamp type	Select from the five lamp shapes shown below. Single-lined circle, Single-lined rectangle, Double-lined circle, Double-lined rectangle, Select shape. Various lamp shapes can be selected from the list and displayed when the shape is specified. The image displayed in the Properties Dialog Box is a sample. The actual display will depend on the settings made on the Color/shape Tab Page.

What is specified on the Color/Shape Tab Page for bit lamps?

The shape and color when lamps are ON and OFF.

What can be selected if a selection other than Select shape is made for the lamp type?

One of 256 colors can be selected.

What should be done if Select shape is selected under Lamp type?

Select a display shape from the list.

What are the details of the Color settings on the Color/Shape Tab Page for bit lamps?

No.	Setting	Details
1	Color 1 and Color 2 (OFF/ON)	Sets the lamp color when the contents of the lamp address is 0 or 1 (OFF/ON). Colors can also be set after referencing the contents of the address.

What are the details of the Select Shape settings on the Color/Shape Tab Page for bit lamps?

No.	Setting	Details
1	ON/OFF Shapes	Sets the shape when the lamp is turned ON or OFF using the Select Shape Button.

What can be set for lamps on the Label Tab Page?

Labels

What can the labels of bit lamps be switched as?

The lamp turns ON and OFF.

What are the details of the settings on the Label Tab Page for bit lamps?

No.	Setting	Details
1	Switch Status	Select ON or OFF from the displayed list.*
2	Apply String	Uses the current character string for all object states. The string is used as the label not only for the selected object, but for all other object states as well. If the Switch Status cannot be set, then the Apply String Button can also not be set.
3	Switch a label with ON/OFF of communications address	Select this option to enable switching the label when the specified address turns ON and OFF. The ON/OFF Button in 1, above, will be enabled when this option is selected.

What does the ON/OFF button do on the Label Tab Page?

Click the ON/OFF Button to edit the labels for when the specified address is ON and OFF. The label will switch each time the ON/OFF Button is clicked.

What can be specified on the Frame Tab Page for bit lamps?

The colors and sizes of the lamp frame to change the shape or color when the button is depressed or raised.

What can be done on the Flicker Tab Page for bit lamps?

Make flicker settings to make the lamp flicker (flash).

What do Control Flags control on the Control Flag Tab Page for bit lamps?

The display of functional objects. Use control flags to enable display when the contents of an address turn ON or OFF.

What can be specified for bit lamps on the Macro Tab Page?

Macros

What trigger can a macro be registered for?

When Address Turns ON/OFF.

What can be displayed and set on the Size/Position Tab Page for bit lamps?

The functional object size and position.

What is a word lamp?

A functional object where the lamp color depends on the level (0 to 9) of the contents of a specified address (word).

How do you create a word lamp?

Select Functional objects – Word lamp or the icon in CX-Designer to create a word lamp.

What can word lamps be changed to?

Multifunction Objects

What can be done if a word lamp is changed to a Multifunction Object?

If changed to a Multifunction Object, the lamp can be changed to a button or multiple functions can be executed at once when the button is pressed.

What settings can be found in the Functional Object Properties Dialog Box for word lamps?

General: Sets the address and lamp shape.
Color/Shape: Sets the lamp display color and shape.
Label: Sets the label display.
Frame: Sets the lamp frame display.
Flicker: Sets the flicker display.
Control Flag: Sets display/no display of the functional object.
Macro: Sets macros to be executed.
Size/Position: Sets the object size and position.

When are the Flicker, Control Flag, Macro, and Size/Position tabs displayed?

When the Display Extension Tabs Option is selected.

What is set on the General Tab Page for word lamps?

The lamp shape and address.

What are the details of the settings on the General Tab Page for word lamps?

No.	Setting	Details
1	Object Comment	Sets an explanatory comment for the pasted object. (Up to 32 characters.)
2	Address	Sets the address referenced for lamp display. Only words can be set.
3	Lamp type	Select from the five lamp shapes shown below: Single-lined circle, Single-lined rectangle, Double-lined circle, Double-lined rectangle, Select shape. Various lamp shapes can be selected from the list and displayed when the shape is specified. The image displayed in the Properties Dialog Box is a sample. The actual display will depend on the settings made on the Color/Shape Tab Page.

What is specified on the Color/Shape Tab Page for word lamps?

The color and shape of the lamp.

What can be selected if a selection other than Select shape is made for the lamp type?

One of 256 colors can be selected.

What should be done if Select shape is selected under Lamp type?

Select a display shape from the list.

What are the details of the settings on the Color Tab Page?

No.	Setting	Details
1	Colors 1 to 10	Sets the lamp color when the contents of the lamp address is 0 to 9. Colors can also be set after referencing the contents of the address.

What are the details of the settings on the Select Shape Tab Page?

No.	Setting	Details
1	Shapes 1 to 10	Sets the lamp display shape when the contents of the lamp address is 0 to 9. If no shape has been selected, the lamp will be a single-lined rectangle during PT operation.

What can be set for lamps on the Label Tab Page?

Labels

What are the details of the settings on the Label Tab Page for word lamps?

No.	Setting	Details
1	Switch label according to address value	Select to display the label text strings specified in a file according to changes in the value of an address. This setting cannot be used if Windows fonts are selected.
2	File Name	Displays the name of the file containing the text strings to display for changes in the value of the address.
3	Browse	Click this button to display the file selection dialog box and select the file containing text strings.
4	Edit	Starts the text editor so that the text file can be edited. To set the text editor that is started when the Edit Button is pressed, select Tools – Option and open the Editor Tab Page.
5	Character Code	Sets the text code used to store text strings in the file.

What can be specified on the Frame Tab Page for word lamps?

The colors and sizes of the lamp frame to change the shape or color when the button is depressed or raised.

What can be done on the Flicker Tab Page for word lamps?

Make flicker settings to make the lamp flicker (flash).

What do control flags control on the Control Flag Tab Page for word lamps?

The display of functional objects. Use control flags to enable display when the contents of an address turn ON or OFF.

What can be specified for word lamps on the Macro Tab Page?

Macros

What trigger can a macro be registered for?

When changing value.

What does the “When changing value” macro trigger do?

Executes macro when the contents of the address change.

What can be displayed and set on the Size/Position Tab Page for word lamps?

The functional object size and position.

What are Multifunction Objects?

Multifunction Objects are functional objects that be can be used to execute more than one function at the same time with just one touch.

What happens when the Multifunction Object is touched or the value at a specified address changes?

The functions that have been set will be executed consecutively. Up to 32 functions can be set for each execution condition.

What does using Multifunction Objects mean?

Operations that were performed using a combination of macros and multiple functional objects can now be performed in one operation.

What functions can be executed using Multifunction Objects?

Function	Details
Write Bit	Turns ON/OFF the specified bit address.
Write Word	Changes the value at a specified word address.
Write String	Sets a character string to a specified word address.
Switch Screen	Switches the displayed screen.
Control Pop-up Screen	Controls pop-up screens, e.g., closing the specified pop-up screen.
Display System Menu	Displays the following System Menu displays. * Data Initialization Screen, Switch Box Functions, Capture Data, Ladder Monitor, Programming Console (C/CS), PLC Data Trace, Troubleshooting (NSJ only), Operation log (sort by occurrence), Operation log (sort by frequency)
Switch Screen NJ-series Troubleshooter	You can display the Troubleshooter for NJ/NX-series Controllers.
Key Button	Transmits a key code to the object to which an input is being made.
Data Block Control	Controls data blocks. The following functions are supported. * Read data from CSV file to PLC Data Block, Write data from PLC Data Block to CSV file, Read data from CSV file to NS, Write data from NS to CSV file, Read data from NS to PLC Data Block, Write data from PLC Data Block to NS, Read record label, Delete record
Contents Control	Switches the displayed contents.
Alarm/Event Control	Saves and clears alarm/event histories. Also performs operations on Alarm/Event Summary & History.
Data Log Control	Controls specified data log groups and data log graphs.
Video Control – Video Capture	Captures a video image at a specified location and saves it in .bmp format to the Memory Card.
Video Control – Contrast Adjustment	Adjusts the contrast, brightness, depth, and tone of video images.
Video Control – Vision Sensor Console Output	Sends a variety of control signals to OMRON Vision Sensors.
Object Control	Scrolls the following objects in a specified direction. List Selection, Alarm/Event Summary/History, Broken-line Graphs, Data Block Tables, Data Log Graphs, and Contents Display
Password Setting	A password can be requested for operation of Multifunction Objects.
Authentication Cancellation	Cancels authentication when an authentication level is set.
Confirmation Dialog Box	A confirmation dialog box can be displayed when a Multifunction Object is operated.
Buzzer	Controls starting and stopped the buzzer.
Special Macro	Executes macros.
Operation Log Control	Initializes or saves the operation log.

What should be done if an NJ/NX-series Controller is the host, a STRING or WORD array tag is specified for the communications address, and the specified text string has an odd number of bytes?

The contents is rounded to an even number of bytes with NULL added. Provide a sufficient size for such tags (e.g., for UTF8, provide about three times the number of characters).

What are the execution conditions for Multifunction Objects?

Timing	Description
When pressing	The set functions are executed when the Multifunction Object is pressed. The timing for execution can also be specified to either Touch ON timing or Touch OFF timing. Touch ON timing: * Executes the functions when the Multifunction Object is pressed. Touch OFF timing: * Executes the functions when the Multifunction Object is released.
When value changed	The set functions are executed when the value at a specified address changes. The communications address can set as a bit or word address, and the following execution timings can be set. When a bit address is specified: Execute when ON/OFF: Executes the functions when the communications address turns ON or turns OFF. Execute when ON: Executes the functions when the communications address turns ON. Execute when OFF: Executes the functions when the communications address turns OFF. When a word address is specified: When an address value changed, Set Value = Address Value, Set Value != Address Value, Set Value < Address Value, Set Value <= Address Value, Set Value > Address Value, Set Value >= Address Value

Timing

Description

When pressing

The set functions are executed when the Multifunction Object is pressed. The timing for execution can also be specified to either Touch ON timing or Touch OFF timing. Touch ON timing: * Executes the functions when the Multifunction Object is pressed. Touch OFF timing: * Executes the functions when the Multifunction Object is released.

When value changed

The set functions are executed when the value at a specified address changes. The communications address can set as a bit or word address, and the following execution timings can be set. When a bit address is specified: Execute when ON/OFF: Executes the functions when the communications address turns ON or turns OFF. Execute when ON: Executes the functions when the communications address turns ON. Execute when OFF: Executes the functions when the communications address turns OFF. When a word address is specified: When an address value changed, Set Value = Address Value, Set Value != Address Value, Set Value < Address Value, Set Value <= Address Value, Set Value > Address Value, Set Value >= Address Value

When should When pressing be specified as the execution condition?

If using the Multifunction Object as a button.

How can Multifunction Objects be used as lamps?

If When pressing is not specified.

Can the operation for when the object is pressed and when the address value is changed be set separately?

Yes. Both can also be used at the same time.

What safety functions can be used to prevent malfunctions when using Multifunction Objects?

Double pressing
ON delay and OFF delay
Prohibiting simultaneous pressing

How can Multifunction Objects be set for the double-pressing operation?

Multifunction Objects can be set so that the touch operation is enabled when the object is pressed twice. The operation is executed if the Multifunction Object is pressed again within the specified reception time after initially being pressed. If the Multifunction Object is not pressed within the set reception time, the set functions will not be executed.

What will happen if the Multifunction Object is pressed again within the reception time?

The functions set for touch operation will be executed.

When will the entire Multifunction Object flicker when the double-pressing operation is performed?

From the first time the Multifunction Object is touched ON until the second time it is touched ON.
From the first time the Multifunction Object is touched ON until the reception time expires (when the Multifunction Object is not touched a second time).

What if the Multifunction Object is pressed before the reception start time?

That input will be ignored.

What happens if a Control Flag disables input while the double-pressing operation is being performed?

The second touch will not be accepted and the functions set for the Multifunction Object will not be executed.

How can Multifunction Objects be set for the ON delay function?

Multifunction Objects can be set so that the touch operation is enabled when the object continues to be pressed for at least as long as the specified delay time. The functions that were set for touch operation will not be executed if the Multifunction Object is released before the delay time has passed.

What happens if both the ON delay and double pressing are set?

The ON delay will function the first time the Multifunction Object is pressed, and will not function the second time it is pressed.

What happens if a Control Flag disables input before the delay time expires?

The functions for which the ON delay was set will not be executed.

When are the functions set for execution at Touch OFF executed for the OFF delay function?

The functions set for execution at Touch OFF will be executed when the specified delay time has passed after the Multifunction Object is released.

What functions are not affected by the OFF delay function?

Functions set for execution When pressing or at Touch ON timing are executed at when the Multifunction Object is pressed, and are thus not affected by the OFF delay function.

What happens if both the OFF delay and double pressing are set?

The OFF delay will not function the first time the Multifunction Object is released, and will function the second time it is released.

How can you check the functional object ID numbers?

Functional object ID numbers can be checked by selecting View – Show ID (click on Show ID) or opening the Functional Object Properties Dialog Box.

What should you do if you want to transmit to other screens?

Set Input Field with Focus to transmit to other screens.

Can data be transmitted if the ID number is set under Specified Input Field?

No. Data cannot be transmitted even if the ID number is set under Specified Input Field.

What will be sent if a yen symbol is specified as one of the characters to be sent?

A backslash will be sent if a yen symbol is specified as one of the characters to be sent.

Is focus moved to input-prohibited objects for focus control codes?

No. Focus is not moved to input-prohibited objects for focus control codes.

If there are two input objects at an equal distance from the current object, where will the focus move to?

If there are two input objects at an equal distance from the current object, the focus will move to the object created first on the CX-Designer.

How do you remove focus from numeral display and input objects and string display and input objects?

Press a functional object other than a Command Button to which Key Button is set to remove focus from numeral display and input objects and string display and input objects.

How do you use S PAGEUP, S PAGEDOWN, S LINEUP or S LINEDOWN?

To use S PAGEUP, S PAGEDOWN, S LINEUP or S LINEDOWN, select Specified Input Field as the Transmit to Option and specify the ID number for list selection.

What does the Data Block Control function do?

This function operates on data blocks. When a button is pressed, CSV file data is transferred to the specified addresses in the PLC or the data from specified addresses in the PLC is transferred to the specified record in the CSV file.

How do you access the Data Block Control function?

Click the Object Control Button and select Data Block Control from the list that is displayed.

What are the Data Block Control Content options?

Select one of the following control operations:

Read data from CSV file to PLC Data Block
Write data from PLC Data Block to CSV file
Read data from CSV file to NS
Write data from NS to CSV file
Read data from NS to PLC Data Block
Write data from PLC Data Block to NS
Read record label
Delete record

What does the Data Block No. specify?

Specifies the data block group number (1 to 100) for the control operation.

Can the group number be set indirectly?

Yes. The group number can be set indirectly through a communications address by selecting the Indirect Option.

When will Multifunction Object processing be canceled?

Multifunction Object processing will be canceled in the following cases:

If the specified data block group does not exist.
If the specified record does not exist.

What does the Read Data from CSV File to PLC Data Block function do?

Reads the data from the specified record in the CSV file to the specified address set in each field.

What does the Record No. specify?

Specifies the record number in the CSV file (0 to 999) to use in the control operation.

Can the record number be set indirectly?

Yes. The record number can be set indirectly through a communications address by selecting the Indirect Option.

What does the File Location specify?

Specifies either the NS or the Memory Card as the location of the CSV file.

Can the file location be set indirectly?

Yes. The file location can be set indirectly by selecting the Indirect Option.

What happens if the specified address is 0?

The NS will be used.

What happens if the specified address is 1?

The Memory Card will be used.

What does the Write Data from PLC Data Block to CSV File function do?

Transfers the data from the specified addresses in the PLC Data Block set in each field to the specified record in the CSV file.

What does the Record Method specify?

The data at the specified record can be overwritten or it can be inserted at the specified record number.

Can the record method be set indirectly?

Yes. The record method can be set indirectly by selecting the Indirect Option.

What happens if the specified address is 0?

The data will be overwritten.

What happens if the specified address is 1?

The data will be inserted.

What does the Read Data from CSV File to NS function do?

Reads the data from the specified record in the CSV file to the specified NS address.

What does the Address specify?

Specifies the communications address for storing the CSV file data.

What does the Record Label specify?

Specifies whether to include the record label when reading.

What does the Write Data from NS to CSV File function do?

Transfers one record of data from the specified addresses in the NS to the specified record in the CSV file.

What does the Address specify?

Specifies the PT memory address where the one record of data to be written to the CSV file is stored.

What does the Read Data from NS to PLC Data Block function do?

Transfers one record of data from the specified addresses in the NS to the PLC Data Block address set in each field.

What does the Address specify?

Specifies the PT memory address where the one record of data is stored.

What does the Record Label specify?

Selects whether or not the record label is included in the data stored at a specified communications address.

What does the Write Data from PLC Data Block to NS function do?

Reads the data from the PLC Data Block address set in each field to the specified NS address.

What does the Read Record Label function do?

Reads the record labels for the specified number of records in the CSV file to the specified NS address.

What does the No. of Records to be read specify?

Specifies the number of record labels to be read at a time from the specified starting record number.

What does the Turn specified address ON when reading the final record specify?

Can be selected to turn ON a specified address when the final record has been read.

What does the Delete Record function do?

Deletes the data for the specified CSV file record.

What does the Contents Control function do?

Switches the displayed contents.

How do you access the Contents Control function?

Press the Object Control Button and select Contents Control from the list that is displayed.

What are the Action options?

The setting items depend on the selected method.

Switch to the specified contents No.
Switch to the indirect reference contents No.
Switch to the next contents No.
Switch to the previous contents No.

What does Switch to the specified contents No. do?

Switches to the specified contents number when the button is pressed.

What does Switch to the indirect reference contents No. do?

Reads the contents of a specified address as the contents number and switches to that contents number.

What does Switch to the next contents No. do?

Displays the data for the next contents number.

What does Switch to the previous contents No. do?

Displays the data for the previous contents number.

What is the format of the contents of the communications address when using Switch to the indirect reference contents No.?

The contents of the communications address are set as a binary value.

When will Multifunction Object processing be canceled?

Multifunction Object processing will be canceled in the following cases:

If the specified contents number does not exist.
If contents control is executed in a screen where contents switching has not been set, the operation will be canceled and the next function will be executed.

What does the Switch to Specified Contents No. function do?

Specifies the contents number to switch to.

What does the Switch to the Indirect Reference Contents No. function do?

Sets the communications address that specifies the contents number to be switched to.

Are there any settings to be made for Switch to the next contents No. and Switch to the previous contents No.?

No. There are no settings to be made for Switch to the next contents No. and Switch to the previous contents No.

What does the Alarm/Event Control function do?

This function operates on alarm/event functions. It saves and clears alarm/event histories. It can also be used to manipulate Alarm/Event Summary & History.

How do you access the Alarm/Event Control function?

Press the Object Control Button and select Alarm/Event Control from the list that is displayed.

What are the Action options?

The setting items depend on the selected method.

Clear
Save
Home (See note.)
End (See note.)
Next (See note.)
Previous (See note.)
From New Date & Time (See note.)
From Old Date & Time (See note.)
From High Priority (See note.)
From Low Priority (See note.)
From High Frequency (See note.)
From Low Frequency (See note.)
Check Selected Alarm (See note.)
Delete Selected Alarm (See note.)
Check All Alarms (See note.)
Cancel All Alarms’ Checks (See note.)
Change Display Type

What does Clear do?

Clears alarm/event histories.

What does Save do?

Saves alarm/event histories to a CSV file.

What does Home do?

Selects the first row in the specified Alarm/Event Summary & History.

What does End do?

Selects the last row in the specified Alarm/Event Summary & History.

What does Next do?

Selects the next row after the currently selected row in the specified Alarm/Event Summary & History.

What does Previous do?

Selects the row before the currently selected row in the specified Alarm/Event Summary & History.

What does From New Date & Time do?

Displays the specified Alarm/Event Summary & History in order from newest to oldest.

What does From Old Date & Time do?

Displays the specified Alarm/Event Summary & History in order from oldest to newest.

What does From High Priority do?

Displays the specified Alarm/Event Summary & History in order from highest priority.

What does From Low Priority do?

Displays the specified Alarm/Event Summary & History in order from lowest priority.

What does From High Frequency do?

Displays the specified Alarm/Event Summary & History in order from highest frequency.

What does From Low Frequency do?

Displays the specified Alarm/Event Summary & History in order from lowest frequency.

What does Check Selected Alarm do?

Checks the selected alarm or event using the Alarm/Event Summary & History.

What does Delete Selected Alarm do?

Deletes the selected alarm/event in the specified Alarm/Event Summary & History.

What does Check All Alarms do?

Checks all alarms/events in the specified Alarm/Event Summary & History.

What does Cancel All Alarms’ Checks do?

Cancels the check of all alarms/events in the specified Alarm/Event Summary & History.

What does Change Display Type do?

Changes the display type for the specified Alarm/Event Summary & History.

What happens when the Change Display Type function is executed?

A menu for selecting the display type will be displayed.

What does the Alarm/Event Summary & History Object ID specify?

Specifies the Alarm/Event Summary & History ID number for the control operation if Clear and Save are not selected.

What are the notes for the Alarm/Event Control function?

An Alarm/Event Summary & History on the base screen or pop-up screen must be set for the control operation. An Alarm/Event Summary & History on a different screen cannot be controlled, e.g., an Alarm/Event Summary & History on the base screen cannot be controlled from a pop-up screen. An Alarm/Event Summary & History on a sheet also cannot be controlled. When creating a Multifunction Object on a sheet, an Alarm/Event Summary & History with a specified ID number on the base screen or pop-up screen using that sheet must be controlled.

What are the notes for the Clear and Save functions?

The Clear and Save functions perform the same operations as $SB32 (Initialize Alarm/Event History) and $SB33 (Save Alarm/Event History), respectively. However, when the Multifunction Object is executed, the $SB32 and $SB33 bits will not turn ON/OFF.

When will Multifunction Object processing be canceled?

Multifunction Object processing will be canceled in the following cases:

If an object ID other than an Alarm/Event Summary & History is specified.
If menu selection is canceled when Change Display Type is selected.

What does the Data Log Control function do?

This function operates on data log functions. It starts and stops data logging and saves logs. Data log graphs can also be manipulated using this function.

How do you access the Data Log Control function?

Click the Object Control Button and select Data Log Control from the list that is displayed.

What are the Action options?

The setting items depend on the selected method.

Start
Stop
Log Clear
Save to File
Read File (See note.)
Pause (See note.)
Move the cursor forward (See note.)
Move the cursor backward (See note.)

What does Start do?

Starts logging of the specified data log group.

What happens if Control start/stop data log by the specified address is selected under the data log group settings?

The set address will turn ON.

What does Stop do?

Stops logging of the specified data log group.

What does Log Clear do?

Clears the log data for the specified data log group.

What does Save to File do?

Writes the logging data to a file to the group folder displayed in the \LOG\Trend Memory Card directory, using the output file name set for the specified data log group.

What does Read File do?

Used to select the file saved in the group folder displayed in the \LOG\Trend Memory Card directory from a pop-up menu. The selected file is displayed as a graph.

What does Pause do?

Pauses and cancels pause of data log graph display.

What does Move the cursor forward do?

Moves the time axis cursor forward one position along the time axis.

What does Move the cursor backward do?

Moves the time axis cursor back one position along the time axis.

What are the notes for the Data Log Control function?

A Data Log Graph on the base screen or pop-up screen must be set for the control operation. A Data Log Graph on a different screen cannot be controlled, e.g., a Data Log Graph on the base screen cannot be controlled from a pop-up screen. A Data Log Graph on a sheet also cannot be controlled. When creating a Multifunction Object on a sheet, a Data Log Graph with a specified ID number on the base screen or pop-up screen using that sheet must be controlled.

What are the notes for the Pause function?

Even if display update is stopped because the Pause function is being used, data logging will continue when Start is selected. The latest log will be displayed when the screen is updated.

What are the notes about graph displays?

Graph displays of files read from the Memory Card will be cleared when screens are switched.

When will Multifunction Object processing be canceled?

Multifunction Object processing will be canceled in the following cases:

If the specified data log group does not exist.
If an object ID other than a data log graph is specified.
If the file save or file read operation fails.
If menu selection is canceled when Read File is selected.

What does Start, Stop, Delete Data Log, and Write File specify?

Specify the data log group for the control operation.

What does Data log group No. specify?

Specifies the data log group number.

What does Read File specify?

Specify the data log graph for the control operation and the display method for the graph that is read.

What does the Data log graph ID specify?

Specifies the ID number of the data log graph for the control operation.

What are the Options for showing the read file?

The graph display method for the read file can be selected from one of the following two options:

Show the file read data only.
Cascade the graph on the file read data.

What are the notes for Options for showing the read file?

Data log graphs also have an Options for showing the read file Setting but the Multifunction Object settings are enabled when executing data log graph file read from a Multifunction Object.

What does Pause, Move the Cursor Forward, and Move the Cursor Backward specify?

Specify the data log graph for the control operation.

What does Video Control – Video Capture do?

Captures a video image at a specified location and saves it in .bmp format to the Memory Card.

How do you access the Video Control – Video Capture function?

Click the Object Control Button and select Video Control – Video Capture from the list that is displayed.

What are the notes for Video Control – Video Capture?

The Multifunction Object processing will be canceled if there is no Video Board mounted on the NS.
Video control – Video Capture can be used only once in any one Multifunction Object.
The setting items depend on the Video Board selected in the System Settings Dialog Box. (Select PT – System Settings to display the System Settings Dialog Box.)

What are the Capture position options for Four-channel Video Input Units (NS-CA001)?

Upper left
Bottom left
Upper right
Bottom right
None

What are the notes for Capture position for Four-channel Video Input Units (NS-CA001)?

Set the video display position for capture.
Select Upper left or none for video display objects with a 640 x 480 display size.
Video images with a display size of 800 x 600 cannot be captured.

What does the File name specify for Four-channel Video Input Units (NS-CA001)?

Sets the file name for saving the captured data (up to 32 characters).

What are the notes for File name for Four-channel Video Input Units (NS-CA001)?

Each time the save operation is executed, the numbers 001 to 999 will be automatically appended to the file name, in order.
Capture data will be saved to the Memory Card in bitmap format.
Example: If the file name is set to Video_LT, the files Video_LT001.bmp to Video_LT999.bmp will be saved to the Memory Card.
Refer to 2-9-3 Command Buttons for information on captured data.

What does Save in a file (if Memory Card is full) specify for Four-channel Video Input Units (NS-CA001)?

Sets the action for when video capture is executed when the Memory Card is full.

What are the Save in a file (if Memory Card is full) options for Four-channel Video Input Units (NS-CA001)?

Update
Stop

What does the Update option do?

Deletes the oldest file with the same file name and saves the data as the newest file name +1.

What does the Stop option do?

Does not save the data.

What are the notes for File name for Two-channel RGB/Video Input Units (NS-CA002)?

Each time the save operation is executed, the numbers 001 to 999 will be automatically appended to the file name, in order.
Capture data will be saved to the Memory Card in bitmap format.
Example: If the file name is set to Video_LT, the files Video_LT001.bmp to Video_LT999.bmp will be saved to the Memory Card.
Refer to 2-9-3 Command Buttons for information on captured data.

What does Video Control – Contrast Adjustment do?

The contrast, brightness, depth, and tone of video images can be adjusted using this function.

How do you access the Video Control – Contrast Adjustment function?

Click the Object Control Button and select Video Control – Contrast Adjustment from the list that is displayed.

What are the notes for Video Control – Contrast Adjustment?

The Multifunction Object processing will be canceled if there is no Video Board mounted on the NS.
Video Control – Contrast Adjustment can be used only once for each Multifunction Object.
The setting items depend on the Video Board selected in the System Settings Dialog Box. (Select PT – System Settings to display the System Settings Dialog Box.)

What are the Contrast adjustment options for Four-channel Video Input Units (NS-CA001)?

-10
-1
+1
+10

What are the notes for Contrast for Four-channel Video Input Units (NS-CA001)?

Select to adjust contrast.
Contrast can be set in 64 levels.

What are the Brightness adjustment options for Four-channel Video Input Units (NS-CA001)?

-10
-1
+1
+10

What are the notes for Brightness for Four-channel Video Input Units (NS-CA001)?

Select to adjust brightness.
Brightness can be set in 128 levels.

What are the Depth adjustment options for Four-channel Video Input Units (NS-CA001)?

-10
-1
+1
+10

What are the notes for Depth for Four-channel Video Input Units (NS-CA001)?

Select to adjust depth.
Depth can be set in 32 levels.

What are the Tone adjustment options for Four-channel Video Input Units (NS-CA001)?

-10
-1
+1
+10

What are the notes for Tone for Four-channel Video Input Units (NS-CA001)?

Select to adjust tone.
Depth can be set in 256 levels.

What are the Contrast adjustment options for Two-channel RGB/Video Input Units (NS-CA002)?

-10
-1
+1
+10

What are the notes for Contrast for Two-channel RGB/Video Input Units (NS-CA002)?

Select to adjust contrast.
Contrast can be set in 64 levels.

What are the Brightness adjustment options for Two-channel RGB/Video Input Units (NS-CA002)?

-10
-1
+1
+10

What are the notes for Brightness for Two-channel RGB/Video Input Units (NS-CA002)?

Select to adjust brightness.
Brightness can be set in 128 levels.

What are the Depth adjustment options for Two-channel RGB/Video Input Units (NS-CA002)?

-10
-1
+1
+10

What are the notes for Depth for Two-channel RGB/Video Input Units (NS-CA002)?

Select to adjust depth.
Depth can be set in 32 levels.

What are the Tone adjustment options for Two-channel RGB/Video Input Units (NS-CA002)?

-10
-1
+1
+10

What are the notes for Tone for Two-channel RGB/Video Input Units (NS-CA002)?

Select to adjust tone.
Tone can be set in 256 levels.

What are the Red adjustment options for Two-channel RGB/Video Input Units (NS-CA002)?

-10
-1
+1
+10

What are the notes for Red for Two-channel RGB/Video Input Units (NS-CA002)?

Select to adjust the gain of the R (red) signal.

What are the Green adjustment options for Two-channel RGB/Video Input Units (NS-CA002)?

-10
-1
+1
+10

What are the notes for Green for Two-channel RGB/Video Input Units (NS-CA002)?

Select to adjust the gain of the G (green) signal.

What are the Blue adjustment options for Two-channel RGB/Video Input Units (NS-CA002)?

-10
-1
+1
+10

What are the notes for Blue for Two-channel RGB/Video Input Units (NS-CA002)?

Select to adjust the gain of the B (blue) signal.

What does the Video Control – Vision Sensor Console Output function do?

Sends one of various control signals to an OMRON Vision Sensor.

How do you access the Video Control – Vision Sensor Console Output function?

Click the Object Control Button and select Video Control – Vision Sensor Console from the list that is displayed.

What are the notes for the Video Control – Vision Sensor Console Output function?

The Multifunction Object processing will be canceled if there is no Video Board mounted on the NS.
Execute Video Control – Vision Sensor Console Output as the last function for touch ON timing.
Video Control – Vision Sensor Console Output can be used only once for each Multifunction Object.

What does Signal type specify?

Sets the type of signal to be sent to the Vision Sensor.

What does the Scroll Object function do?

Scroll bars on functional objects can be operated from Multifunction Objects. The functional object is scrolled in the specified direction for the specified amount.

What are the Scroll Object actions executable from Multifunction Objects?

Scroll down
Scroll up
Scroll left
Scroll right

What are the scrolling units for functional objects that can be scrolled using the object scroll function?

Functional object	Scrolling unit
List Selection	Row
Broken-line Graph	Dot
Alarm/Event Summary/History	Row (scroll up/down)
	Item (scroll right/left)
Data Log Graph	Gradation
Data Block Table	Row (scroll up/down)
	Item (scroll right/left)
Contents Display (for string display)	Row (scroll up/down)
	Dot (scroll right/left)
Contents Display (for image display)	Dot

What are the notes for functional objects that can be scrolled using the object scroll function?

A functional object on the base screen or pop-up screen must be set for scrolling. A functional object on a different screen cannot be set, e.g., a functional object on the base screen cannot scrolled from a pop-up screen. Functional objects on sheets also cannot be scrolled. When creating a Multifunction Object on a sheet, a functional object with a specified ID number on the base screen or pop-up screen using that sheet must be scrolled.

What are the notes for the Scroll Object function?

The operation for the object scroll function is the same as when the scroll button on the functional object itself is pressed.
Functional objects that do not display the scroll button can still be scrolled from a Multifunction Object.
The object scroll function will be disabled in the following cases:
- If scrolling is attempted in a direction for which scrolling is not possible.
Multifunction Object processing will be canceled in the following cases:
- If an object with the specified ID does not exist.
- If the object scroll function has been executed for a functional object that does not have a scroll bar.

How do you access the Scroll Object function?

Press the Object Control Button and select Scroll Object from the list that is displayed.

What are the Action options for Scroll Object?

Select one of the following scroll directions:

Scroll Down
Scroll Up
Scroll Right
Scroll Left

What does the Object ID specify?

Specify the ID number for the functional object to be scrolled.

What are the Scroll Amount options?

Specify the scroll amount:

1 Page
1/2 Page
Specified No. of Lines/Dots/Items

What are the notes for Specified No. of Lines/Dots/Items?

If Specified No. of Lines/Dots/Items is selected, specify a scroll amount from 1 to 9,999.

What does the Password Setting function do?

The password setting function requests a password before executing a functional object. The functions set for execution after Password Setting are executed only after the password matching the set level has been entered. The next functions will not be executed if an incorrect password has been entered three times or password input has been canceled.

What is an example of how Password Setting works?

If the following settings are made, the Password Dialog Box will be displayed after Write Bit and Write Word are executed. If the correct password is entered, the Write String and Switch Screen functions will be executed.

Write Bit and Write Word are executed. (Always executed before the Password Dialog Box displayed.)
The Password Dialog Box is displayed.
If the correct password is entered, Write String and Switch Screen will be executed. If an incorrect password is entered three times or password input canceled, Write String and Switch Screen will not be executed.

How do I set the text attributes for the display string on the Text Tab Page?

Refer to Text Attributes under 2-8 Common Functional Object Functions for details.

How do I set the fill color for the background of functional objects on the Background Tab Page?

Refer to Setting Colors under 2-8 Common Functional Object Functions for details.

What are the details of the Keypad Tab Page settings?

Input method: Select one of the following input methods for numerals:
- System keypad
- Large system keypad
- Input from a pop-up screen
- Other input method (e.g., using Command Buttons)
  
  The input method can be restricted to use only functional objects or barcodes.
Display Position of Keypad/Pop-up Screen: Select one of the following display positions for keypad and pop-up screen display for numeric input:
- Below This Object
- Above This Object
- Top left, bottom left, top right, bottom right, or center of screen
- Any Position (The top left position of the keypad or pop-up screen is specified.)
Input Order: Set the order for moving the input focus. Refer to 2-8 Common Functional Object Functions.
Use Temporary Input object: Select to use a temporary input object when inputting a value. Selection is possible only when Input from Pop-up Screen or Other Input Method (command button etc.) is set under Input method.

Command Buttons are used for input when Input from Pop-up Screen or Other Input Method are set. For these options, Command Buttons to which Key Buttons are set must be created on the pop-up screen or the main screen.

When can numerals be input?

Numerals can be input if a numeral display and input object is pressed during PT operation. The specified pop-up screen will be displayed if Input from a pop-up screen is set. Numerals can be input from Command Buttons created on the pop-up screen.

What happens if the keypad or pop-up screen protrudes outside the main screen?

The display position of the keypad or pop-up screen will be automatically adjusted so that it does not protrude.

What happens if the keypad or pop-up screen overlaps another functional object?

The keypad or pop-up screen will be displayed on top.

What happens if Input from a pop-up screen or Other input method are selected?

The focus will shift if an object other than a Command Button to which Key Buttons are set is selected.

What happens if Input from a pop-up screen is selected as the input method and the pop-up screen is closed during input?

The numeral display and input object will continue waiting for input. In such cases, cancel or confirm the input by pressing a Command Button set to send a control code such as CAN or RET. Refer to 2-9-3 Command Buttons for information.

How many types of system keypad are there?

There are two types of system keypad: keypads with temporary input and keypads without temporary input. Switching the keypad type is performed using system bit memory $SB18. $SB18: ON Keypad with Temporary Input $SB18: OFF Keypad without Temporary Input

What is temporary input?

The input value will be displayed. If displaying the unit name is specified, it will be displayed in the temporary input field as well.

What does the Frame Tab Page do?

Specify the colors and sizes of the object frame to change the shape or color when the button is depressed or raised. Refer to Frames under 2-8 Common Functional Object Functions for details.

What are the details of the Maximum and Minimum Input Limits Tab Page settings?

Sets the maximum and minimum limits for input values. A message is displayed and input prevented if a value that exceeds the maximum or minimum limits is entered. The values set as the maximum and minimum limits are before scale conversion. If a value is set under Value that exceeds the input range for the storage type and the OK Button is pressed, a message will be displayed and the setting will not be made. The same message will be displayed and the setting will not be made if a value is set that exceeds the input range for the storage format, even if unit and a scale are set. This tab page is also used to set the watch maximum and watch minimum limits for input values, as well as the text color and background color displayed when the watch maximum or watch minimum limit is exceeded.

Maximum Input Limit: Sets the maximum limit under the Value or Indirect Reference.
Minimum Input Limit: Sets the minimum limit under the Value or Indirect Reference.
Watch Maximum Limit: The Watch Maximum Limit can be set as a fixed value or set indirectly through an address. It is also possible to set the text color and background color that will be displayed if this upper limit is exceeded.
Watch Minimum Limit: The Watch Minimum Limit can be set as a fixed value or set indirectly through an address. It is also possible to set the text color and background color that will be displayed if this lower limit is exceeded.

How should I set maximum/minimum limits and watch maximum/minimum limits?

Set maximum/minimum limits and watch maximum/minimum limits that suitable for the storage type set on the General Tab Page. If, however, the hexadecimal, binary, or octal display types have been selected, enter a value converted to decimal (USINT, UINT, UDINT, or ULINT) or hexadecimal. When inputting data in hexadecimal, input an “H” before the hexadecimal digits. Refer to Numeral Display and Storage Type (General Tab) in 2-8 Common Functional Object Functions for details on storage types.

What happens if indirect reference is specified under Watch Maximum/Minimum Limits settings?

Use the same type for the values as set on the General Tab Page for the storage type. For example, if REAL (real number) is specified on the General Tab Page, set the maximum and minimum limits as real numbers to the address for indirect reference.

When should I set the maximum and minimum limits?

Set the maximum and minimum limits before input if they are to be indirectly specified. If the maximum and minimum limits are set using the Before inputting numeral macro for the numeral display and input object, those values will not be reflected in the maximum and minimum limit display on the keypad.

What does the Flicker Tab Page do?

Make flicker settings to make the object flicker (flash). Refer to Flicker under 2-8 Common Functional Object Functions for details.

What does the Write Settings Tab Page do?

Use the write settings to display a confirmation dialog box before writing values to a write address. The confirmation message can be changed. Refer to Write Settings under 2-8 Common Functional Object Functions for details.

What happens if no value is entered and the ENTER Button on the tenkey pad is pressed or ENT or RET is sent using a Command Button (Key Button)?

The write confirmation dialog box will not be displayed. The contents of the address set under Turn ON the specified address when the value is confirmed will not turn ON either.

What does the Password Tab Page do?

A password can be set for when the object area is pressed. Five passwords of up to 16 characters each can be set. One password can be requested for each object. Refer to Passwords under 2-8 Common Functional Object Functions for details.

What does the Control Flag Tab Page do?

Control flags control the input and display of functional objects. Use control flags to enable display or input when the contents of an address turn ON or OFF. Refer to Control Flags under 2-8 Common Functional Object Functions for details. To display but not input numerals, change the control flag settings to Disable input. If the object is hidden, input will not be possible even if the object is set to enable input.

What are the details of the Macro Tab Page settings?

Macros can be specified for display and input objects. Macros executed by the following triggers can be registered:

Before Inputting Numeral: Executes macro before numeral input starts.
Before Writing Numeral: Executes macro immediately before the numeric value is written.
When Changing Numeral: Executes macro when the numerals change.
Value = Set value: Executes macro when the value stored at the communications address equals the set value.
Value > Set value: Executes macro when the value stored at the communications address is greater than the set value.
Value < Set value: Executes macro when the value stored at the communications address is less than the set value.

A value comparison macro can be registered only for a Numeral Display & Input object.

What happens if the conditions are met at the same time for the When Changing Numeral macro and a value-comparison macro (Value = Set Value, Value > Set Value, or Value < Set Value)?

The When Changing Numeral macro will be given priority over the value-comparison macro.

Where can I find more information on setting methods for the Macro Tab Page?

Refer to NS-series Macro Reference in the CX-Designer.

What does the Size/Position Tab Page do?

Displays and sets the functional object size and position. Refer to Size/Position under 2-8 Common Functional Object Functions for details.

What are String display and input objects?

String display and input objects are functional objects that convert the contents of a specified address to character string data and display that data. String display and input objects also convert data through character string input from a barcode reader or virtual keyboard. The string display and input object can be used for string display only (i.e., no input) by changing the control flag settings.

How do I create a string display and input object?

Select Functional objects – String display & input or the icon in CX-Designer.

How do I use the display-only function for the string display and input object?

The following procedure must be performed to use the display-only function:

Display the String Display and Input Functional Object Properties Dialog Box.
Click Display Extension Tabs and select the displayed Control Flag Tab Page.
Select Disable under the Input.

What are the settings for Functional Object Properties for string display and input?

This section describes the settings items in the Functional Object Properties Dialog Box for string display and input:

General: Sets the address and string display type.
Text: Sets the text attributes for the displayed characters.
Background: Sets the background color for character string display.
Keyboard: Sets the input method and display position and size of the keyboard.
Frame: Sets the character string frame display.
Flicker: Sets the flicker display.
Write: Sets whether or not a confirmation message is displayed when character strings are written to addresses.
Password: Sets whether or not a password input field is displayed when character strings are written to addresses.
Control Flag: Sets enable/disable input and display/no display for objects.
Macro: Sets macros that operate when characters are input or character strings change.
Size/Position: Sets the object size and position.

Note: These tabs are displayed when the Display Extension Tabs Option is selected.

What are the details of the General Tab Page settings?

Object Comment: Sets an explanatory comment for the pasted object. (Up to 32 characters.) The set comment can be printed or edited together.
String Display Type: Specifies the number of characters and the string display type. ASCII or Unicode (UTF-16) or Unicode (UTF-8) can be specified for the display type. ASCII express half-size characters as 1 byte and full-size characters as 2 bytes. Unicode (UTF-16) expresses all characters as 2 bytes. Unicode UTF-8 provides character codes that express either single-byte characters or multi-byte (2 to 6) characters. For example, if “ab” was stored in the start address $W0, the string would be stored as $W0=0×6162 in ASCII. In Unicode the string would be stored as $W0=0×61 and $W1=0×62.
Pop-up menu: Makes settings to enable display strings to be selected from pop-up menus. At the PT, a scroll bar will be displayed if there are more than ten items on a pop-up menu. Use the scroll bar to display other items on the menu.
Address information: Sets the address to be accessed and written by string display and input object.
Apply to All Labels: Uses the address of the selected label for all labels. This setting cannot be made in the following cases.
- When the Address of String Display & Input object Check Box is selected on the Edit/Display Tab Page of the Option Dialog Box accessed by selecting Tools – Option.
- When there is only one label.
Input Process: If the Fill the blank characters with a specified character Option is selected, spaces or nulls are automatically added to the end of strings to fill the space if the number of input characters is less than the set number of characters. For example, if the number of characters has been set to 8 and only the 5 characters ABCDE are input, then 3 spaces will be added: ABCDE@@@ (@ indicates a space). If the Fill the blank characters with a specified character Option is not selected, all characters up to null at the end of the string will be written to the specified address. For example, if the set string is ABCDEFG, when A is written to the address, 0 will be written in place of B, and C and the other characters will not be written. The data is written in word format, so when the string AB is written, CD will be 0.
Display on entry: If the *Display input characters by ** Option is selected, characters input using the virtual keyboard or the Key Buttons or characters being monitored are indicated by *.

What are some notes about the General Tab Page?

To make settings easier to understand when CX-Designer objects are pasted, the number of characters is indicated by using Xs (e.g., XXXXX).
If the number of characters or the address is set too high, the maximum address for the specified area may be exceeded, e.g., when the number of words is 256 and the start address is $W32767. If the maximum address in the area is exceeded, a communications error will occur when the screen to which the string display and input object is set is opened on the PT. Make sure the maximum address is not exceeded.
If ASCII codes are set in string displays, the following character codes will be used by the PT de-pending on the system language that has been set:

System Language Character Display Example (character code B5)

Japanese Shift-JIS code μ

Chinese (traditional or simplified) GB2312 code Nothing is displayed because there are no corresponding characters.

Other Latin 1code μ
If an NJ/NX-series Controller is the host, a STRING or WORD array tag is specified for the commu-nications address, and the specified text string has an odd number of bytes, the contents is rounded to an even number of bytes with NULL added. Provide a sufficient size for such tags (e.g., for UTF8, provide about three times the number of characters).

How do I set the text attributes for the display string on the Text Tab Page?

Refer to Text Attributes under 2-8 Common Functional Object Functions for details.

How do I set the background color for character string display on the Background Tab Page?

Sets the background color for character string display from a selection of 256 colors. Refer to Back-ground and Setting Colors in 2-8 Common Functional Object Functions for details.

What are the details of the Keyboard Tab Page settings?

Input Method: Select one of the following input methods for character strings:
- System keypad
- Large system keypad
- Select keyboard: Full keyboard, decimal keys, hexadecimal keys, decimal keys (+,−), hexadecimal (+,−), decimal keys (+, −, *, /), or hexadecimal keys (+,−, *, /).
- Input from a pop-up screen
- Other input method (e.g., using Command Buttons)
  
  The input method can be restricted to use only functional objects or barcodes. Refer to 3-6 Inputting Numerals and Character Strings for information on how to operate these keypads.
Display Position of Keypad/Pop-up Screen: Select one of the following display positions for keypad and pop-up screen display for character string input:
- Below This Object
- Above This Object
- Top left, bottom left, top right, bottom right, or center of screen
- Any position
Input Order: Set the order for moving the input focus. Refer to 2-8 Common Functional Object Functions.
Use Temporary Input object: Select to use a Temporary Input Object when inputting a character string. Selection is possible only when Input from Pop-up Screen or Other Input Method (command button etc.) is set under Input method.
String Input: Select one of the following options for the input display field status when inputting character strings:
- Add to the current string
- Enter the new string. (Monitor the current string when the input focus has been set)
- Enter the new string. (Clear the current string when the input focus has been set)
- Add to the current string. (Move the cursor to front of string when setting the input focus has been set)

Command Buttons are used for input when Input from pop-up screen or Other input method are set. For these options, Command Buttons to which Key Buttons are set must be created on the pop-up screen or the main screen.

When can characters be input?

Characters can be input if a string display and input object is pressed during PT operation. The specified pop-up screen will be displayed if Input from a pop-up screen is set. Character strings can be input from Command Buttons created on the pop-up screen.

What happens if the keypad or pop-up screen protrudes outside the main screen?

The display position of the keypad or pop-up screen will be automatically adjusted so that it does not protrude.

What happens if the keypad or pop-up screen overlaps another functional object?

The keypad or pop-up screen will be displayed on top.

What happens if Input from pop-up screen or Other input method are selected?

The focus will shift if an object other than a Command Button to which Key Buttons are set is selected.

What happens if Input from pop-up screen is selected as the input method and the pop-up screen is closed during input?

The string display and input object will continue waiting for input. In such cases, cancel or confirm the input by pressing a Command Button set to send a control code such as CAN or RET. Refer to 2-9-3 Command Buttons for information.

When can the Add to the current string (Move the cursor to front of string when setting the input focus has been set) option be set?

Only for PT system version 8.2 or higher.

What does the Frame Tab Page do?

Specify the colors and sizes of the object frame to change the shape or color when the button is depressed or raised. Refer to Frames under 2-8 Common Functional Object Functions for details.

What does the Flicker Tab Page do?

Make flicker settings to make the object flicker (flash). Refer to Flicker under 2-8 Common Functional Object Functions for details.

What does the Write Tab Page do?

Use the write settings to display a confirmation dialog box before writing strings to a write address. The confirmation message can be changed. Refer to Write Settings under 2-8 Common Functional Object Functions for details.

What does the Password Tab Page do?

What does the Control Flag Tab Page do?

Control flags control the input and display of functional objects. Use control flags to enable display or input when the contents of an address turn ON or OFF. Refer to Control Flags under 2-8 Common Functional Object Functions for details. To display but not input characters strings, change the control flag settings to Disable input. If the object is hidden, input will not be possible even if the object is set to enable input.

What are the details of the Macro Tab Page settings?

Macros can be specified for string display and input objects. Macros executed by the following triggers can be registered:

Before inputting string: Executes macro before string input starts.
Before writing string: Executes macro immediately before the string is written.
When changing string: Executes macro when the string changes.

Where can I find more information on setting methods for the Macro Tab Page?

Refer to NS-series Macro Reference in the CX-Designer.

What does the Size/Position Tab Page do?

Displays and sets the functional object size and position. Refer to Size/Position under 2-8 Common Functional Object Functions for details.

What are Thumbwheel switches?

Thumbwheel switches are objects that increase or decrease numeric data when + or – (increase or decrease) Buttons are pressed and display and set the data. The values of single digits are increased or decreased and the contents of the allocated address is updated each time the value changes.

What are the settings for Functional Object Properties for thumbwheel switches?

This section describes the settings items in the Functional Object Properties Dialog Box for thumbwheel switches.

General: Sets the address and numeral display type.
Text: Sets the text attributes for the displayed numerals.
Background: Sets the background color for numeral display.
Frame: Sets the frame display for numeral display.
Max/Min: Sets the maximum and minimum limits for input.
Flicker: Sets the flicker display.
Write: Sets whether or not a confirmation message is displayed when values are written to addresses.
Password: Sets whether or not a password input field is displayed when values are written to addresses.
Control Flag: Sets display/no display for objects and enable/disable for input.
Macro: Sets macros that operate when values are input or address contents change.
Size/Position: Sets the object size and position.

Note: These tabs are displayed when the Display Extension Tabs Option is selected.

What are the details of the General Tab Page settings?

Object Comment: Sets an explanatory comment for the pasted object. (Up to 32 characters.)
Numeral display type: Sets the numeral display type.

Display type Select from the following 4 display formats:
- Decimal
- Hexadecimal
- Binary
- Octal
Storage type Select from the following 11 storage types:
- INT signed, 1 word
- UINT unsigned, 1 word
- DINT signed, 2 words
- UDINT unsigned, 2 words
- REAL (real number)
- BCD2 unsigned, 1 word
- BCD2 unsigned, 2 words
- BCD1 signed (leftmost digit: F), 1 word
- BCD1 signed (leftmost digit: F), 2 words
- BCD2 signed (leftmost bit: 1), 1 word
- BCD2 signed (leftmost bit: 1), 2 words
Note: Can be selected only when display type set to Decimal.
Specifies the number of display digits for the integer and decimals: The numeral display can be changed to any format.

Example: When set to 2 integers and 1 decimal place:

Actual value Numeral display

9.51 9.5

99.51 99.5

999.51 99.5

Integer Decimal As shown above, digits after the specified number of integers are ignored. The decimal is rounded to the specified number of digits.
Fill blank digits with zeros: Inserts zeros to fill the specified number of display digits. For example, if the number of display digits is set to 4 and the value is 1, the display will be 0001. Note: When set to Fill blank digits with zeros, 9.51 in the example in the table will be displayed as 09.51.
Button position: Sets the position for the + and – Buttons.
Address: Sets the destination address accessed and written by thumbwheel switches.
Units and scales: Scales the contents of the communications address using the set scale value. Click Limit check after scale conversion to check the upper and lower limits after the contents have been converted using the set scale. Refer to Unit and Scale in 2-8 Common Functional Object Functions for information on units and scales.

What are some notes about the General Tab Page?

When pasting CX-Designer functional objects, use the numeral 9 and create a number such as 9,999.99 to set the number of display digits by default.
For real numbers, 7 digits are valid. If the number of display digits is set higher than 7, error will occur when numbers are input and the values may change for digits that are not input.
If a value that cannot be displayed at the address is stored, e.g., 10 (a binary value) has been stored when the display type is BCD, # will be displayed for every digit. When this happens, the + and – Buttons cannot be used to change the value. Use the PLC or another functional object to reset the value.
Units cannot be displayed for thumbwheel switches.
The scale for a thumbwheel switch must be set to a power of 10, and the offset must be set to 0. If any other values are set, the thumbwheel switch many not operate properly.

How do I set the text attributes for the display string on the Text Tab Page?

Sets the text attributes, such as font and color, for the display string. Refer to Text Attributes under 2-8 Common Functional Object Functions for details.

How do I set the background color for thumbwheel switches on the Background Tab Page?

Sets the background color for thumbwheel switches from a selection of 256 colors. Refer to Setting Colors under 2-8 Common Functional Object Functions for details.

What does the Frame Tab Page do?

Specify the colors and sizes of the object frame to change the shape or color when the button is depressed or raised. Refer to Frames under 2-8 Common Functional Object Functions for details.

What are the details of the Max/Min Tab Page?

Set the maximum and minimum limits for the contents of the write address. The setting range for maximum and minimum limits depends on the numeral display type.

Maximum limit: Sets the maximum limit. Select either value or indirect reference.
Minimum limit: Sets the minimum limit. Select either value or indirect reference.

How should I set the maximum and minimum limits?

Set maximum and minimum limits suitable for the storage type set on the General Tab Page. If, however, the hexadecimal, binary, or octal display types have been selected, enter a value converted to decimal (UINT or UDINT). Refer to Numeral Display and Storage Type (General Tab) in 2-8 Common Functional Object Functions for details on storage types.

What happens if indirect reference is specified under the maximum and minimum limits?

What happens if a value is written from the PLC or another functional object that exceeds the set maximum or minimum limits?

The + and – Buttons can no longer be used to change the value. Use the PLC or another functional object to reset the value.

What does the Flicker Tab Page do?

Make flicker settings to make the object flicker (flash). Refer to Flicker under 2-8 Common Functional Object Functions for details.

What does the Write Tab Page do?

What does the Password Tab Page do?

What does the Control Flag Tab Page do?

What are the details of the Macro Tab Page settings?

Macros can be specified for string display and input objects. Macros executed by the following triggers can be registered.

Before writing numeral: Executes macro immediately before the numeric value is written.
When Changing numeral: Executes macro when the numerals change.

Where can I find more information on setting methods for the Macro Tab Page?

Refer to NS-series Macro Reference in the CX-Designer.

What does the Size/Position Tab Page do?

Displays and sets the functional object size and position. Refer to Size/Position under 2-8 Common Functional Object Functions for details.

What are List selection objects?

List selection objects display and select character string data. Character strings to be displayed in lists can be selected from specified addresses or text files. List selection objects can write the selected line or string information to a specified address, allowing the string information to be received and used by the host. List strings to be displayed from the host can also be specified. ASCII or Unicode can be selected as the character code for list text strings to be assigned to addresses.

Note: ASCII characters use one byte per half-size character and two bytes per full-size character. Unicode characters use two bytes for any character.

How do I create a list selection object?

Select Functional objects – List selection or the icon in CX-Designer.

What are the settings for Functional Object Properties for list selection objects?

This section describes the settings items in the Functional Object Properties Dialog Box for list selection.

General: Sets the reference destination for list data, list size, and object comment.
Text: Sets the text attributes for the displayed string.
Background: Sets the background color for the list selection object.
Selection: Sets the selection bar color, selected line number, and string destination.
Scroll bar: Sets the scroll bar size and scroll width.
Frame: Sets the list selection frame display.
Flicker: Sets the flicker display.
Password: Sets the password to be entered when a button is pressed.
Control Flag: Sets enable/disable input and display/no display for objects.
Macro: Sets macros that operate when lists are selected.
Size/Position: Sets the object size and position.
External Control: Sets switching of displayed block position from an external device.

Note: These tabs are displayed when the Display Extension Tabs Option is selected.

What are the details of the General Tab Page settings?

Comment: Sets an explanatory comment for the pasted object. (Up to 32 characters.)
List data: Browses for a specified address or text file for strings to be displayed in the list.

If Store in $W is selected, the string data stored after a specified address will be displayed. If Store in a file is selected, the string in a specified text file will be displayed. If storing strings in text files for display using a list selection object, make the text file extension .LST. The file name can be up to 12 characters, including the .LST extension. Click the Edit Button to open the text editor specified under CX-Designer Options (Notepad is the default text editor) and edit the currently selected text file. The file to be read can also be specified indirectly. Select Use a file for indirect reference and specify Store in a file for the LST file that created the list of file names to be read. The list file that will be read will switch based on the contents of the address specified under Address for Specifying the File Line.
Apply to All Labels: Applies the following items to all of the selected labels:
- Store in &W: Address set value
- Store in file: File name
Apply to All Labels cannot be set in the following cases.
- When the List data of List Selection object Check Box is selected on the Edit/Display Tab Page of the Option Dialog Box accessed by selecting Tools – Option.
- When there is only one label.
Character code: Select one of the following for the string in the address or the text file: ASCII, UFT-16 Unicode, or UFT-8 Unicode. This setting is for the character code that is finally used to display the list object. This setting is not related to processing of files for indirect specifications between file lists, which are always processed in multibyte code.
List size: Specifies the number of characters per line and the number of lines in a list. Specifies the number of half-size characters when ASCII has been set. Full-size characters are counted as two characters. For Unicode characters, all characters are counted as one character. 1 to 1,024 lines max. 1 to 256 characters per line If list strings are held in internal memory at $W, the settings will be as shown below because $W is one word (two bytes) in length.

What are the video input options for an NS-series PT?

An NS-CA001 Video Input Unit or NS-CA002 RGB/Video Input Unit can be installed to display images from video cameras or Vision Sensors on the PT. An NS-CA001 Video Input Unit can connect up to four video cameras or Vision Sensors and can be installed on an NS12, NS10, or NS8 PT, but cannot be mounted to the NS15 or NS5 PTs. The NS-CA002 RGB/Video Input Unit can be installed on NS15, NS12, NS10, or NS8 PTs, although with the NS15 PT, only RGB inputs can be used.

What are the video input method choices for NS-CA001 and NS-CA002? How are they selected?

There are two choices: NTSC and PAL. To select the video input method, select PT – System Setting and click the Video Tab.

When connecting more than one camera, can the NTSC/PAL setting be set for each camera individually?

No, when connecting more than one camera, the NTSC/PAL setting for those cameras is performed at once.

How is a video display created on the NS-CA001 Video Input Unit?

To create a video display, select Functional objects – Video Display or click the icon on the CX-Designer.

What precautions should be taken when creating video displays?

Display Size: Unlike other functional objects, the user must choose the size for the video display from three choices. The selected size cannot be changed using the mouse on the screen. The sizes that can be selected depend on the PT model:
- Object size 320 x 240
- Object size 640 x 480
- Object size 800 x 600 (NS12 only)

What happens if the 800×600 display size is set as the default, the PT model is changed from an NS12 to an NS10 or NS8, and then a video display is created?

If the NS12 is set for the PT model, 800×600 size is set as the default for video displays, the model is changed from NS12 to NS10 or NS8, and a video display is created, the size of the object will be 800×600 and be larger than the screen. In this case, the object size should be changed to 320×240 or 640×480.

What happens if the NS12 is selected for the PT Model, an 800×600 video display object is created, and then the PT Model is changed?

If the NS12 is selected for the PT model, an 800×600 video display object is created, and the PT model is changed, the screen size will become smaller but the object size will remain at 800×600 and extend off the screen. In this case, the object size should be changed to 320×240 or 640×480.

On what types of screens can video displays be created? On what types can they not be created?

Video displays can only be created on normal screens and cannot be created on:

Pop-up screens
Sheets
Frames

What happens if an error or message dialog is displayed on the screen for a macro instruction?

The video display will be temporarily stopped. Press the OK Button in the dialog box to redisplay the video display.

Can video displays be performed on NS5-SQ@/NS5-TQ@/NS5-MQ@? Can video displays be created on the CX-Designer with these models selected?

Video displays cannot be performed on these models. The user can create a video display on the CX-Designer with these models selected as the PT model but should not transfer the screen data to the PT.

Why should other objects not be placed on a video display object?

Video displays will always be on top on the PT and objects placed under the video display will be invisible.

Why should pop-up screens and keypads not be created on a video display?

Pop-up screens and keypads created on a video display also will not be displayed. Objects should be created so that they do not overlap with video display objects.

How many video devices can be connected to the Video Input Unit? Why? What happens if the size is set to 800×600 or 640×480? What happens when choosing a 320×240 size?

Up to four video devices can be connected to the Video Input Unit because it has four input channels. If the size is set to 800×600 or 640×480, one channel will be specified in the properties and displayed even if all channels have devices connected to the PT. When choosing a 320×240 size, the number of display channels (1 to 4) and display positions can be selected in the properties.

What items are set in the Video Display Dialog Box?

General: Select the display size and input channel.
Frame: Set the frame color for the video display.
Image Position: Select the image location where data from the video device will be obtained and set the space line.
Position: Set the display position on the screen (this tab will be displayed when the Display Extension Tabs option is selected).

What should be entered in the Object Comment field on the General Tab Page?

Enter the comment as an explanation of the created object (up to 32 characters).

What sizes are available in the Size field on the General Tab Page? What is the exception?

800×600 (XVGA)
640×480 (VGA)
320×240 (QVGA)

A 800×600 size can only be specified when the NS12-TS0@-V@ is selected for the PT model.

What happens when 320×240 size is selected in the Size field? What should be set?

When 320×240 size is selected, a screen is split into four areas, and pictures of all four channels can be displayed on the screen. In this case:

Select the display position of the pictures for each input channel.
Select the input channels.
Set the display position for each channel on the screen.

What does selecting channel 1 for the upper left and channel 2 for the bottom left look like?

Images are displayed as shown below. Other objects can be arranged.

Channel 2

Channel 1

240 dots

320 dots

When choosing 640×480 or 800×600 in the Size field, what should be set in the Select Input CH field?

Set the input channel to be displayed.

What is selected and set on the Image Position Tab Page? What is this function designed to do?

Select the part of the image to be displayed on the screen and set the start position to get the data from the channel. This function is designed to modify non-display areas contained in the data so that only necessary parts are displayed.

What range should be used for the Dot position and Line position when setting the Start Point of Video Display Frame? What happens if this range is exceeded?

Dot position: -64 to 127

Line position: -5 to 31

The image will be irregular if the dot position or line position cause the input image data to exceed the valid range.

What is set under the Space Line Setting? What happens to this area?

If the image size is smaller than the display area, the spare part will be filled with black and displayed. Set the size of the fill area. The area set as space line is filled with black on the display area.

What are the valid ranges for Space Line Setting?

320×240: 0 to 239
640×480: 0 to 479
800×600: 0 to 599

What is selected on the Frame Tab Page?

Select a frame color.

When can a frame not be set?

A frame cannot be set when using an 800×600 size.

What is specified on the Size/Position Tab Page (Extension Tab)? What are the setting ranges?

Specify the display position for the video display by entering the horizontal position (X) and vertical position (Y) from the upper left corner of the screen. The setting ranges for X and Y are 0 to 160 and 0 to 120. Specify vertical and horizontal position in dot units.

When can the position be set?

The position can only be set when choosing 640×480 or 320×240 size on the NS12.

What is a consecutive line drawing? How is it different from regular polylines?

A consecutive line drawing is an object drawn within the object area using communications address values as coordinates of the vertex points. Unlike regular polylines, consecutive line drawing shapes can be changed dynamically.

Where is the origin of a consecutive line drawing? What happens if a vertex is outside the object area?

The top left vertex of the created object is the origin. If a vertex is outside of the object area, that vertex will not be drawn.

What do the communications address values specify?

Each vertex’s X and Y coordinates.

What is set on the General Tab Page for consecutive line drawings? What is set on the Size/Position Tab Page?

General: Sets basic properties, such as the maximum number of vertices and the starting address of the X-Y coordinates.

Size/Position: Sets the object’s size and position. (This tab is displayed when the Display Extension Tabs option is selected.)

What is set in the Object Comment field on the General Tab Page for consecutive line drawings?

Set an explanatory comment for the pasted object (up to 32 characters).

What does the Color setting do? Can it be set indirectly?

Sets the line color. The color can also be set indirectly through an address.

What is the valid range for line thickness? What is the exception?

If the Line Style is set to Solid Line, the thickness can be set between 1 and 8. For other line styles, the thickness can be set to either 1 or 2.

What are the five line style options? For which line style can a line thickness of 3 or higher be set?

Solid line
Broken line
Dotted line
1-dot chain lines
2-dot chain lines

A line thickness of 3 or higher can only be set for a solid line.

What is the valid range for Max. no. of vertices?

Between 2 and 128 vertices.

What happens when the Display All option is selected in the No. of Vertices field? What happens when the Indirect Reference option is selected?

When the Display All option is selected, all of the vertices set in the Max. no. of vertices setting will be displayed. When the Indirect Reference option is selected, the number of vertices indicated in the specified address will be displayed. If the specified address’s value is 0 or 1, the object will not be drawn.

What is set in the Start Address of X-Y Coordinate field? How should the addresses be set?

Sets the starting address of the communications addresses containing the X-Y coordinates. Set the addresses so that the start address contains the X coordinate of vertex 1, the next address contains the Y coordinate of vertex 1, and each subsequent pair of words contains the X and Y coordinates for one vertex.

How is the data format (BCD or binary) set for: an indirectly referenced Color, an indirectly referenced No. of vertices, and the X-Y coordinate data starting at the Start Address of X-Y Coordinate?

Select Project Properties from the PT Menu and set the data format on the Data Format Tab Page.

What does the Size/Position Tab Page (Extension Tab) do?

Displays and sets the functional object size and position.

What are alarms and events? What can they be used for? How many can be registered for one project with NS-series PTs?

Alarms and events are functions that enable addresses registered for alarm monitoring to provide notification for alarms from those addresses. They can also be used as functions that execute display when a bit to which start operation or a similar event has been specified is turned ON. Up to 5,000 alarms and events can be registered and monitored for one project with NS-series PTs.

What can related functional objects display?

Current alarms/events (alarm/event display) or a historical list (alarm/event summary and history). They can also switch the display automatically to a specified screen while an alarm or event is generated.

How are alarms/events registered?

Select PT – Alarm/Event or click the Register alarm/event button in the Properties Dialog Box for the related functional object.

What does the Switch setting do?

Switches the message display for each label.

What does the Edit setting do?

Changes settings for the selected item in an alarm/event list. Click the Edit Button to display the Alarm/Event Details Dialog Box.

What does the Add setting do?

Creates a new alarm/event. Click the Add Button to display the Alarm/Event Details Dialog Box.

What does the Delete setting do?

Deletes the selected item in an alarm/event list. Click the Delete Button to display a confirmation box and click the Yes Button to delete the item.

What does the Move up/Move down setting do?

Moves up or down the number for the item selected in the alarm/event list.

What does the Import CSV setting do?

Alarm/event settings edited in CSV format can be imported from a file. Click the Import CSV Button to display the Select alarm CSV Import Dialog Box. Select either Add to Current Alarm or Delete Current Alarm and click the OK button.

What does the Export CSV setting do?

Alarm/event settings can be exported to CSV files. Click the Export CSV Button to display the Export CSV Dialog Box. Specify the file name and click the Save Button.

What does the Parameter setting do?

Sets the screen switching when alarms or events are generated and the conditions for saving alarm/event history. Click the Parameters Button to display the Alarm/Event Parameters Settings Dialog Box.

What does the Add Info setting do?

Allocates the address to refer to when an alarm or event occurs. Click the Add Info. Button to display the Add Alarm/Event Info. Dialog Box.

What does the Icon setting do?

Specifies a bitmap or JPEG file for the icon. Click the Icon Button to display the Details Dialog Box.

What can be set for registered alarms or events?

Messages can be set for each label.

What happens to registered alarms/events?

They can be output in CSV format and edited as a group.

What might happen if consecutive addresses are not set in the Alarm/event Setting Items Dialog Box under Alarm/event setting? What should be done in this case?

The communications speed may be reduced. Set consecutive addresses if the communications speed is slow.

What does the Switch setting do in the Alarm/Event Details Dialog Box?

Sets messages for each label.

What does the Occurred Text setting do?

Sets the character color displayed when alarms or events occur.

What does the Released Text setting do?

Sets the character color displayed when alarms or events are cleared.

What happens when the Use the String Table option is selected?

The user can select to use a character string registered in the character string table as messages to display functional objects related to alarms and events.

What is set in the Message field?

The message (up to 80 characters) to be displayed on related functional objects.

What does the String No. field do?

Selects the character string to be displayed as a message from the character string table displayed when the Refer to the String Table Button is clicked if the Use the String Table option is selected. The selected character string number is displayed in this field.

What is set in the Address field?

The address to monitor alarms/events.

What is set in the Priority field? How does this affect related functional objects?

The alarm/event priority order (1 to 9,999). The display order on related functional objects can be changed based on the priority order.

What are the four Display Type options? What can be applied based on the display type?

High alarm
Middle alarm
Low alarm
Event

Restrictions can be applied based on the display type when displaying alarms using related functional objects.

What does the Group setting do? How is this done? How does this affect related functional objects?

Specifies the group that the set alarm/event data belongs to. Click the Set Button to display the Alarm/Event Group Settings Dialog Box, select the group, add it, and click the OK Button. Only information for specified groups can be displayed when displaying on related functional objects.

What is set under Screen Switch?

The screen that will be automatically switched to when an alarm or event is generated.

What does the Switch Screen When Alarm/Event Occurred setting do?

Automatically switches screens when alarms/events are generated, i.e., when the contents of the specified address turn ON.

What is set under Contents No.?

The contents number for contents display when an alarm/event occurs.

What happens if the Switch Contents When Alarm/Event Occurred checkbox is selected?

Automatically switches the contents display to the contents set under Contents No. if an alarm/event occurs.

What does the Save to History setting do?

Records when alarms/events are generated and cleared. The number of alarms and events and the messages are also saved to the history file.

What does the Delete When Alarm/Event is Cancelled setting do? When is this option available?

Automatically clears messages from related functional objects when alarms/events are cleared, i.e., when the contents of the specified address turn OFF. The messages are displayed again if the address turns ON again. This option is only available when Save to history file is not selected.

What are the Detection Type options? What does each option do?

Raise alarm on Set (to 1) of address: An alarm occurs when the address set for the alarm/event goes from OFF to ON and is cleared when the address goes from ON to OFF.
Raise alarm on Reset (to 0) of address: An alarm occurs when the address set for the alarm/event goes from ON to OFF and is cleared when the address goes from OFF to ON.

What are the restrictions that apply when referencing the character string table?

If the character string has more than 80 characters, it will be treated as a message with 80 characters max.
If there are multiple lines set for the character string, the first line will be treated as the message.

How is the group that belongs to the set alarm/event data specified?

Select the group in the CX-Designer Dialog Box and click the OK Button.

How can a variable name or I/O comment be automatically set in a message?

Select Options from the Tools Menu.
Open the Edit/Disp Tab Window in the Option Dialog Box.
Select Reflect symbols in labels when setting addresses and select either Symbol Name or I/O Comment for the label character string.
Set the communications address in the Address Field of the Alarm/Event Details Dialog Box.

The symbol name or I/O comment for the communications address set for the message will be set automatically.

What happens if there are two or more labels?

The symbol names and I/O comments will be set for the character strings for all the labels.

In what cases will symbol names and I/O comments not be set automatically?

When the communications address is replaced by another one
When a symbol name or I/O comment is changed from a symbol table after the label character string has been set
When an alarm/event was added from a CSV import
When the Use the String Table option is selected

What happens if the Reflect to label when an address is set option is selected in the Option Dialog Box?

The symbol name or I/O comment will be reflected in the label of an ON/OFF Button, Word Button, Bit Lamp, or Word Lamp when the communications address is set.

When are the CSV import and export functions useful?

When there are numerous alarms or events registered and they need to be edited efficiently.

What should be done to use these functions? What happens?

Click the Import CSV or Export CSV Button in the Alarm/Event Settings Dialog Box. A File Selection Dialog Box will be displayed. If exporting to a CSV file, enter the file name in the File name input field and click the Save Button. If importing from a CSV file, select the file name to be imported and press the Open Button.

What format is the output CSV file displayed in?

The following format. Display for Microsoft Excel:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 8 13 14 15 16 17 18

What is set in the Address field of the CSV file? What type of addresses can be set?

The communications address. Only bit addresses can be set.

What is the valid range for the Priority order in the CSV file?

1 to 9,999

What are the Display Type options in the CSV file? What does each option indicate?

highalarm: High alarm
middlealarm: Middle alarm
lowalarm: Low alarm
Event: Event

What is the valid range for the Group No. in the CSV file?

0 to 99

What is the maximum length for the Group Name in the CSV file?

Up to 32 characters.

What are the Auto Switch Screen options in the CSV file? What does each option indicate?

ON: Automatic screen switch
OFF: No automatic screen switch

What is the valid range for Screen No. in the CSV file?

0 to 3999

What are the Auto Deletion options in the CSV file? What does each option indicate?

ON: Automatic delete
OFF: No automatic delete

What are the Save History options in the CSV file? What does each option indicate?

ON: Save
OFF: No save

What is the valid range for Occurred Text and Released Text in the CSV file?

0 to 255

What are the Detection Type options in the CSV file? What does each option indicate?

Raise alarm on Set (to 1) of address: posedge
Raise alarm on Reset (to 0) of address: negedge

What are the Auto Switch Contents options in the CSV file? What does each option indicate?

Automatically switch contents switching: ON
Do not automatic switch contents: OFF

What is the valid range for Contents No. in the CSV file?

0 to 9999

What are the Refer to the String Table options in the CSV file? What does each option indicate?

Reference the character string table: ON
Do not reference the character string table: OFF

What should be done with the String No. field if the message character string will be referenced in a character string table? What should be done if it will not be referenced?

Set the character string number. Leave blank.

What is the maximum length for the Alarm Message in the CSV file? What should be done with this field if the message character string will be referenced in the character string table?

Up to 80 characters. Leave blank.

What is displayed in the Title field of the CSV file? What should be done with this information?

The CX-Designer version information and the title for each item will be displayed in lines one and two. Do not change or delete this information.

Why can the set numerals and character strings be edited together? What should be done after editing?

The efficient editing functions of commercially available software can be used. Import the file again to enable the settings.

How can alarm/event settings be changed and added?

By using the import function.

What happens if an address registered as an existing alarm/event is set in the CSV file? What happens if an address that has not been registered yet is set?

The contents of the CSV file will change. It will be added as a new alarm/event.

What happens if the imported CSV file contains any errors? What should be done in this case?

An error message will be displayed. Click the OK Button to edit the CSV file.

What can be used to edit CSV files? What will happen to items with alarm messages or other character strings when a CSV file is opened using a text editor? What is the maximum number of characters that can be set for each item using a text editor?

Spreadsheet software or a text editor. Items with alarm messages or other character strings will be delimited by inverted commas (“ ”). 1,110 characters.

How many alarms or events can be set for each CSV file? What happens if there are more?

Up to 5,000. If there are more than 5,000, only 5,000 will be imported. The rest of the settings will be ignored.

What should be used to change the alarm/event number after importing a CSV file?

The Move up/Move down Button.

What type of CSV files can be imported?

CSV files exported from the CX-Designer.

What do the Parameters settings do?

Sets the screen switching for when alarms or events are generated and the conditions for saving alarm/event history.

What does the Alarm/Event History setting do? What is the maximum that can be set for each?

Sets the maximum number of alarms and the maximum number of events to be recorded. Up to 1,024.

What happens if the Use Ring Buffer option is selected? What happens if it is not selected?

If selected, the oldest alarm/event record will be deleted when the set record number is exceeded and an alarm/event is generated, and the new alarm/event will be saved. If not selected, new alarms or events will not be recorded once the set record number has been reached.

How are alarm and event histories kept?

Separately.

What does the Add Alarm and Event Information setting do?

Sets as attributes the addresses whose contents are displayed for alarm/event summaries or history objects, or the addresses whose contents are stored in the alarm/event summary. The specified address is referenced and displayed on the alarm/event summary and history object or saved.

How can the address be input?

Directly or set in the Address Setting Dialog Box, displayed when the corresponding Set button is clicked.

How is the data type (BCD or binary) set for the specified addresses?

Select Project properties from the PT Menu and set the data type on the Data Format Tab Page.

What does the Specifying Icons setting do?

Sets bitmap files for the alarm/event summary and history object icon.

How are bitmap files set for the alarm/event summary and history object icon?

Select PT – Alarm/event setting to display the Alarm/event Settings Dialog Box and then click the Icon Button at the bottom of the screen to display the Details Dialog Box.
Select the checkbox for the icon for which the bitmap will be specified and click the Browse Button. The File Selection Dialog Box will be displayed. Specify the file to be displayed as the icon.
Click the Select Button to close the dialog box. An image of the selected bitmap file will be displayed to the right of the existing icon in the Details Dialog Box. Click the OK Button to close the Details Dialog Box.
Click the OK Button to close the Alarm/event Settings Dialog Box.
Set the icon to be displayed on the Icon Tab of the Alarm/event Summary and History Object Properties Dialog Box.
Click the OK Button to close the Properties Dialog Box.

The icons to which bitmap files have been specified will be displayed on the alarm/event summary and history object.

What happens when the number of colors in the designated image file is a True Color number?

It is automatically reduced to 32,000.

What is the maximum length of file names? What characters can be used?

Up to 12 characters (8 file name characters and 3 file extension characters). The following characters can be used: alphanumeric characters, underscores (_), dollar signs ($), and periods (.).

What does the data log function do? What can be done with the saved data? What applications can be executed using data log objects in version 6 and later?

The data log function saves changes over time in the contents of the allocated address. The saved data can be displayed as a data log graph object for each set data logging group. In version 6 and later, the following two applications can be executed:

Saving log data automatically and periodically to a Memory Card and continuing logging
Overlapping a data log graph (standard data) in the Memory Card with the graph being logged

How are data logging groups registered? How many can be registered?

Select PT – Data Log Settings. Data log groups from 1 to 100 can be registered.

What is displayed when PT – Data Log Settings is selected? What is done in this dialog box?

The Data Log Setting Dialog Box. New data logging groups are created and settings are edited, deleted, and confirmed.

How is a set data logging group changed?

Select the display line for the group to be changed and press the Edit Button to display the Data Log Group Setting Dialog Box.

How are data logging groups added? What is the maximum number of groups that can be registered? What happens when this number is reached?

Click the Add Button to display the Data Log Group Setting Dialog Box. Up to 100. The Add Button will be disabled.

How is a set data logging group deleted?

Select the display line for that group and click the Delete Button. A confirmation message will be displayed; click the Yes Button to delete the group.

What does clicking the Icon Button do?

Displays the Details Dialog Box. BMP/JPEG files can be specified to the icon for the data log object.

What is the maximum number of logging points? How is this number different for the NS5?

Up to 160,000. For the NS5, it is 120,000 points.

What is the maximum number of addresses that can be constantly logged?

Up to 128.

What is the maximum number of points for constant logging?

Up to 50,000.

What does clicking the Advanced Setting Button do?

Sets display settings for data log graphs.

What is the purpose of the Transmit Numerical Data to setting?

This setting sets the destination address for the data under the Set Button. The data length is set in each data log and depends on the storage format.

What are the three Transmit Numerical Data to settings and what do they do?

The settings are:

Stores graph 1 value to $W0 and $W1.
Stores graph 2 value to $W2 and $W3.
Stores graph 3 value to $W4 and $W5.

How does the Data enable/disable bit setting work?

This setting specifies an address that, when turned on, turns on the specified bit when the time axis cursor is on the logged point. The specified bit remains ON until it is turned OFF from another functional object or the cursor is moved to a data-disabled position.

How can the display be linked to control flags for numeral display and input objects?

For example, the display can be linked to control flags for numeral display and input objects, as shown in the following diagram:

Setting Example

Data enable/disable bit: $B0
Numeral display and input object control flag (display/no display (numeral display): indirect): $B0 z

$B0:OFF $B0:ON

1 2 3 Numeric value not displayed Numeric value displayed.

What does the Transfer Date & Time option do?

Select the Transmit Time Data option to transfer the date and time for the position where the time axis cursor and the time axis cross to a specified address. The date and time will be output in the format specified for the Date and Time Display for Time Axis.

What is the purpose of the Transfer Date & Time to setting?

This setting specifies an address to store the date and time data. One word of data each is stored for the year, month, day, day of the week, hour, minute, second, and millisecond.

What is the Transmit the Data with Offset Time Display Format setting?

This setting will display data with offset (the time elapsed since data logging was started) when transmitting time data.

What does the Graph display position setting do?

This setting makes settings for display refresh.

What happens when you select Position end of scrolling at the center of data log graph?

The display will scroll when a log graph has reached the center of the time axis.

What is the purpose of the Setting Address for Updating Display setting?

When setting the address for display refresh, check Setting Address for Updating Display, then press the Set Button.

What does the Scroll Control Flag setting do?

This setting designates an address. If the bit specified here turns from OFF to ON, the graph display is scrolled for the amount of time specified by the contents of the address specified under Address for specifying Scroll interval. Once the display has been scrolled, the address for updating the display will automatically turn OFF. Turn ON the address to update the graph at any time.

How does the Address for Specifying Scroll Interval setting work?

This setting specifies an address to be set under the Set Button. When the Refresh notification address turns ON, the graph display is scrolled for the amount of time specified here. The amount of time is specified in binary form. The graph will not be scrolled if 0 is specified. Seconds, minutes, or hours can be selected as the unit of time.

What happens if the clock is changed during PT operation?

If the clock is changed during PT operation, the time will no longer match the time that has been displayed up to that point, so graphs will not be displayed correctly. In such cases, clear the log by using the Log Clear icon on the data log graph or initializing the data under the System Menu.

What happens when the number of logged data items reaches the set number of log points when Save with Ring Buffer is selected?

If Save with Ring Buffer is selected for the data log save format, data will be deleted in order from the oldest data when the number of logged data items reaches the set number of log points. Sometimes this means that the oldest graph data will have already been deleted when the graph is scrolled when the address for updating the display turns ON. For example, if the display direction has been set to Left, the data displayed at the left of the graph may have already been deleted. In this situation, the graph display is also refreshed when the address for updating the display turns OFF and the data registered at that time is displayed on the graph.

What are the implications of frequently switching frames?

If frames are switched frequently, the display update may take some time, and communications may be delayed. This means that sometimes data is not logged.

How is the data format (BCD or binary) for Transmit Time Data To set?

The data format (BCD or binary) for Transmit Time Data To is set by selecting PT – Project – Properties and using the Data Format Tab Page.

What are the Numeral Value Axis Settings and how are they accessed?

Click the Scale Settings Button to display the following Details of Numeral Value Axis screen.

What are the available Scale settings in the Details of Numeral Value Axis screen?

The Scale settings are:

Scale: Makes the settings related to the numeral value axis’ scale.
- Select Scale to display scale
- Line: Select Line to display scale lines.
- No. of division: Sets the number of divisions between 1 and 99.
- Scale color: Sets the scale color (from 256 available colors).
- Scale length: Sets the scale length between 4 and 32.
- Sub-scale: Sets whether or not there will be sub-scale. Select Sub-scale to display auxiliary gradations.
- Sub-scale Line: Select Sub-scale lines to display sub-scale lines.
- No. of division: Sets the number of gradations between 1 and 99.
Scale settings: Makes the settings for maximum, minimum, and threshold values, and show values. Refer to Numeral Value Axis Settings to be described later in this section for information on how to make settings.

What is the purpose of the Scale Settings setting in the Details of Numeral Value Axis screen?

Select to make settings under “Scaling range of numeral value axis,” “Threshold,” and “Show values”.

What are the available Storage type settings in the Details of Numeral Value Axis screen?

Select the format for storing the scaling range of the numeral axis value from the four types below:

INT (signed 1 word),
UINT (unsigned 1 word),
DINT (signed 2 words),
UDINT (unsigned 2 words).

How does the Scaling range of numeral value axis setting work?

This setting sets the minimum and maximum values on the numeral value axis. The maximum and minimum that can be set depend on the storage type.

What is the purpose of the Indirect Reference setting in the Scaling range of numeral value axis?

Select to set the minimum and maximum values at a communications address.

What are the available Threshold settings in the Details of Numeral Value Axis screen?

The Threshold settings are:

Set the threshold: Select to make threshold settings.
Threshold H: The threshold H that can be set depends on the storage type.
Line Color: Sets the line color (from 256 available colors) for threshold H.
Threshold L: The threshold L that can be set depends on the storage type.
Line Color: Sets the line color (from 256 available colors) for threshold L.

What are the available Line Style settings?

Sets the line style from one of the following 5 styles:

Solid line,
dotted line,
broken line,
single chain line,
double chain line.

What does the Show values setting do?

This setting selects whether to show values on the numeral value axis.

What happens to values that exceed the number of digits set under Format?

“–” will be displayed for values that exceed the number of digits set under Format. Example: When Format is set to 2 (digits), and the maximum value is 100.

How are text attributes set?

Click the Text Attribute Button to set text attributes such as the text color and font. For details, refer to 2-8-6 Text Attributes.

How is the background for the graph set?

The Background Tab Page sets whether or not the background is tiled. If the background is to be tiled, the background color for the graph can be selected from 256 colors. Click Indirect reference of color to reference the color code stored at a specified address for the background color. Refer to Background under 2-8 Common Functional Object Functions for details.

What is the function of the Icon Tab Page?

This page selects the icon to be displayed for manipulation of graph display.

What are the Icons that can be set?

The following Icons can be set:

Icons: Sets whether or not an icon will be used for manipulating graph display.
Stop:
- Stops data logging when pressed, if the Control start/stop data log by the specified address option was not selected when data log group settings were made.
- Select to allocate the set address to the icon, if the Control start/stop data log by the specified address option was selected when data log group settings were made. This option cannot be selected if the Status icon is selected.
Restart:
- Press to restart data logging that has been stopped, if Control start/stop data log by the specified address was not selected when data log group settings were made.
- Select to allocate the set address to the icon, if the Control start/stop data log by the specified address option was selected when data log group settings were made. This option cannot be selected if the Status icon is selected.
Status: Can be selected only when Control start/stop data log by the specified address was selected when data log group settings were made. Displays the status of the specified address when an externally-controlled address is specified to start/stop data logging. Select when the specified address is allocated to an externally-controlled address.
Log Clear: Clears the graph display and log.
Pause: Pauses display of the data log graph. Press the icon again to cancel pause.
Save to File: Writes a file of logging data to the Memory Card/Log/Trend directory for the data log group being displayed, in the output file name set for the data log group being displayed.
Read File: Selects the file saved to the Memory Card/Log/Trend directory from a popup menu for the data log group being displayed. The selected file is displayed on the graph.

What options are available for icon confirmation dialog boxes?

A confirmation dialog box can be set to be displayed when any of the icons are pressed. These options include:

Show Confirmation Dialog when Stopping
Show Confirmation Dialog when Restarting
Show Confirmation Dialog when Deleting Log Data
Show Confirmation Dialog when Pausing
Show Confirmation Dialog when Saving to a File
Show Confirmation Dialog when Reading a CSV File.

What are the options for showing the read file?

Select the graph display format when reading a file, from the following two options:

Show the read data only
Cascade the read data to a graph.

What is the range for the Icon size setting?

Set the size of the icon between 16 and 64.

What happens if display update is stopped because the Pause icon has been pressed, but data logging will continue when the Restart icon is selected?

Even if display update is stopped because the Pause icon has been pressed, data logging will continue when the Restart icon is selected. The latest log is then displayed if the screen is updated.

What happens to the Clear icon if the icon size is smaller than 32 dots × 32 dots?

The Clear icon usually displays the characters LOG CLR, but if the icon size is smaller than 32 dots × 32 dots, only C will appear on the icon.

How can files be written by using the system memory ($SB and $SW)?

Files can be written by using the system memory ($SB and $SW). Log data for a specified group can be saved as a CSV file by storing the group number in $SW37 and turning ON $SB36.

What is the format of the output file name?

Output file name: Output file name set for each group All log data can be saved as a CSV file if “0” is stored in $SW37 and $SB36 is turned ON. Output file name: Trend@.CSV @ = 001 to 999, the number is automatically incremented beginning with 001 each time the output operation is executed. After 999, the number reverts to 001.

How can specific group data or all log data be initialized?

Similarly, if the group number or “0” is stored in $SW37 and $SB35 is turned ON, the specified group data or all log data is initialized.

What happens to graph displays of files read from the Memory Card when screens are switched?

Graph displays of files read from the Memory Card will be cleared when screens are switched.

What is the rewrite limit for Memory Cards?

Memory Cards can be rewritten up to 100,000 times. If you were to repeatedly rewrite the Card in 10-minute intervals, 100,000 rewriting cycles would be completed within 2 years.

What settings are available on the Scroll Bar Tab Page?

This page sets display/no display, scroll width, and button size for the graph scroll bar displayed at the top of the data log graph. The scroll bar will appear at the top of the graph when the display direction is set to Left or Right. It will appear to the right of the object if the display direction is set to Up or Down. Refer to Scroll Bars under 2-8 Common Functional Object Functions for details.

What settings are available on the Frame Tab Page (Extension Tab)?

This page specifies the colors and sizes of the functional object frame to change the shape or color when the graph frame is depressed or raised. Refer to Frames under 2-8 Common Functional Object Functions for details.

What settings are available on the Flicker Tab Page (Extension Tab)?

This page contains settings for making the functional object flicker (flash). Refer to Flicker under 2-8 Common Functional Object Functions for details.

What settings are available on the Control Flag Tab Page (Extension Tab)?

Control flags can control the display of and input to functional objects. Use control flags to enable display and input when the contents of an address turn ON or OFF. Refer to Control Flags under 2-8 Common Functional Object Functions for details.

What settings are available on the Size/Position Tab Page (Extension Tab)?

This page displays and sets the functional object size and position. Refer to Size/Position under 2-8 Common Functional Object Functions for details.

What applications can be executed in version 6 and later versions?

In version 6 and later versions, the following two applications can be executed by using data log objects:

Automatic periodical saving of log data to a Memory Card and continued logging
Overlapping a data log graph (standard data) in the Memory Card with the graph being logged.

What is the setting flowchart for automatically and periodically saving log data to a Memory Card and continuing logging?

The following flowchart shows the settings required to automatically and periodically save log data to a Memory Card and continue logging:

Register data logging group
Set log timing, data log save, and number of logging points
Add logging addresses
Set functional object properties
Set graph time axis scale
Make icon and option settings
Set logfile output format

What is an example procedure for saving data log files to the Memory Card and continuing logging?

Example: To automatically save every 5 hours a data log file with 5 log addresses and a sampling cycle of 2 seconds.

How is the Logfile Output Format set?

The method for setting the Logfile Output Format is shown below:

Select PT – System setting to display the System Setting Dialog Box
Click the History Tab Page
Set Logfile Output Format to “Vertical axis: Time/ Horizontal axis: Address”
Set the Data Log/Broken-line History to “Hold data of always logging (Data Log)”
Click the OK Button

How are settings made for Data Logging Group Registration?

The settings for data logging group registration are as follows:

Select PT – Data log or click the Register Group Button on the General Tab Page in the data log Functional Object Properties Dialog Box to display the Data Log Setting Dialog Box
Click the Add Button in the Data Log Setting Dialog Box to display the Data Log Group Setting Dialog Box
Set the sampling cycle
Select both Save the data periodically and Save with Ring Buffer
Set the number of logging points to be saved in one CSV file. In this example, the logging period is 5 hours (18,000 s), and the sampling cycle is 2 s, so the number of logging points is 18,000 ÷ 2, i.e., 9,000, so 9000 is set
Click the Set Button next to Output file at the upper right of the screen to display the Data Log Output File Dialog Box. Enter the output file name. The default is “Trd00”. Up to 36 alphanumeric characters can be used for a file name
Enter the output file name
Click the OK Button to return to the Data Log Group Setting Dialog Box
Check that the logging period is set to Always
Click the Add Button to display the Data Log Address Setting Dialog Box
Set the logging address and the address storage type
Click the OK Button to return to the Data Log Group Setting Dialog Box
Repeat steps 10 to 12 to register 5 addresses
Click the OK Button in the Data Log Group Setting Dialog Box
Click the OK Button in the Data Log Setting Dialog Box

How are settings made for Functional Object Properties?

The settings for Functional Object Properties are as follows:

Place a data log object on the screen if there isn’t one there already
Double-click the data log object to display the Functional Object Properties Dialog Box
Display the Time Axis Tab Page and set the scale for the time axis. In this example, “10” minutes’ worth of log data is set for display
Display the Icon Tab Page and de-select Log clear and Save to file under Icon Display. These icons are not required because the log is set to be automatically saved
Select Show the read data only under Options for showing the read file in the Options section
Click the OK Button to transfer the project to the NS hardware

What are the operations to be performed on the NS hardware?

Operations on the NS hardware are as follows:

Insert the Memory Card into the NS hardware
Start the NS hardware, which now has the project created using the procedures described in the last section. The NS hardware logs 5 addresses every 2 seconds and periodically saves the logging data to the Memory Card. To read the saved data from the Memory Card, click the Read File Icon on the Object while logging is stopped to display the list of data file names, in descending order, in a pop-up menu. Select the desired file from the pop-up menu. To display a graph that is currently being logged, click the Read File Icon on the Object and select Show the current logging graph in the first line of the pop-up menu

What is the setting flowchart for overlapping the standard data and the data currently being logged on the same graph?

The settings required to overlap the standard data and the data currently being logged on the same graph are shown in the following flowchart:

Register data log group
Set log timing, data log save, the number of log points, and log start/stop
Add log addresses
Set functional object properties
Set graph time axis scale and scroll end position
Make icon and option settings
Set graph display parameters
Set logfile output format

What is an example procedure for overlapping the data log graph on the Memory Card (standard data) and the graph of data currently being logged (measured data)?

When setting the logging address cycle time to, for example, 100 s, to log data for one address at a sampling cycle of 1 s for a period of 100 s after the specified address changes from OFF to ON.

What are two examples of log start/stop control?

There are two examples for log start/stop control:

Example 1: Allocation of specified address (PT memory: $B100) to an icon and manual control of log start/stop
Example 2: Allocation of an externally controlled address (SerialA: CIO00100.00) to the specified address.

How is the data log file output format set?

The method for setting the data log file output format is described below:

Select PT – System setting to display the System Settings Dialog Box
Select the History Tab Page
Set Logfile Output Format to “Vertical Axis: Time/ Horizontal Axis: Address”
Set the Data Log/Broken-line History to “Hold data of always logging (Data Log)”
Click the OK Button

How are settings made for Data Logging Group Registration when manually controlling log start/stop?

The settings for data logging group registration are as follows:

Select PT – Data log or click the Register Group Button on the General Tab Page in the data log Functional Object Properties Dialog Box to display the Data Log Setting Dialog Box
Click the Add Button in the Data Log Setting Dialog Box to display the Data Log Group Setting Dialog Box
Set the log timing. In this example, the sampling cycle is “1” (s)
De-select both Save the data periodically and Save with Ring Buffer
Set the number of logging points. In this example, the logging period is 100 s, and the sampling cycle is 1 s, so the number of logging points to be set is “100” (100 ÷ 1 = 100)
Click the Set Button next to Output file name at the upper right of the screen to display the Data Log Output File Name Setting Dialog Box. Enter the output file name. The default is “Trd00”. A file name of up to 36 alphanumeric characters can be used
Enter the output file name
Click the OK Button to return to the Data Log Group Setting Dialog Box
Select Control start/stop data log by the specified address ON/OFF and click the Set Button to set the address. The address is set to “PT memory: $B100” in this example. Select Clear data logs when the address is ON to clear the previous data log graph when the specified address changes from OFF to ON
Click the Add Button to display the Data Log Address Setting Dialog Box
Set the logging address and the address storage type
Click the OK Button to return to the Data Log Group Setting Dialog Box
Click the OK Button in the Data Log Group Setting Dialog Box
Click the OK Button in the Data Log Settings Dialog Box

How are settings made for Functional Object Properties when manually controlling log start/stop?

The settings for Functional Object Properties are as follows:

Place a data log object on the screen if there isn’t one there already
Double-click the data log object to display the General Tab Page for the functional object properties
Select the address from the data log address list, and double-click it or click the Display Parameter Button at the top right of the screen to display the Display Parameter Settings Dialog Box
Click the Line Color Box to set the line color for the stored graph, to distinguish the stored graph read from the Memory Card from the graph of data currently being logged. In this example, No. 012 (red) is selected for the stored graph. If Step display is selected, the logged points will be connected by vertical and horizontal lines. De-select Step display to join logging points by the shortest possible straight line
Click the OK Button to return to the Functional Object Properties Dialog Box
Display the Display Tab Page and set the graph time axis scale. In this example, “50” seconds’ worth of logging data will be displayed
Select Position end of scrolling at the center of data log graph when all of the standard data cannot fit on to the graph
Display the Icon Tab Page and select Cascade the read data to a graph under Options
Click the OK Button and transfer the project to the NS hardware

What are the operations to be performed on the NS hardware when manually controlling log start/stop?

The operations on the NS hardware are as follows:

Insert the Memory Card into the NS hardware
Start the NS hardware, which now has the project created using the procedures described in the last section. When address $B100 changes from OFF to ON, data is logged for 100 s (1 min 40 s). When the Start icon is pressed, $B100 changes to ON and logging starts. When the Stop icon is pressed, $B100 changes to OFF, and logging stops. To read saved data, press the Read File icon on the object while logging is stopped and select the desired file from the pop-up menu

How is the data log file output format set when externally controlling log start/stop?

The method for setting data log file output formats is shown below:

Select PT – System setting to display the System Settings Dialog Box
Click the History Tab
Set Logfile Output Format to “Vertical Axis: Time/ Horizontal Axis: Address”
Set the Data Log/Broken-line History to “Hold data of always logging (Data Log)”
Click the OK Button

How are settings made for Data Logging Group Registration when externally controlling log start/stop?

The settings for Data Logging Group Registration are as follows:

Select PT – Data Log Setting or click the Register Group Button on the General Tab Page in the data log Functional Object Properties Dialog Box to display the Data Log Settings Dialog Box
Click the Add Button to display the Data Log Group Setting Dialog Box
Set the log timing. In this example, the sampling cycle is “1” (s)
De-select both Save the data periodically and Save with Ring Buffer
Set the number of logging points. In this example, the logging period is 100 s and the sampling cycle is 1 s, so the number of logging points to be set is “100” (100 ÷ 1 = 100)
Click the Set Button next to Output file at the upper right of the screen to display the Data Log Output File Dialog Box. Enter the output file name. The default is “Trd00”. A file name of up to 36 alphanumeric characters can be used
Enter the output file name
Click the OK Button to return to the Data Log Group Setting Dialog Box
Select Control start/stop data log by the specified address ON/OFF and click the Set Button to set the address. The address is set to “SerialA: CIO00100.00” in this example. Select Clear data logs when he address is ON to clear the previous data log graph when the specified address changes from OFF to ON
Click the Add Button to display the Data Log Address Setting Dialog Box
Set the logging address and the address storage type
Click the OK Button to return to the Data Log Group Setting Dialog Box
Click the OK Button in the Data Log Group Setting Dialog Box
Click the OK Button in the Data Log Settings Dialog Box

How are settings made for Functional Object Properties when externally controlling log start/stop?

The settings for Functional Object Properties are as follows:

Place a data log object on the screen if there isn’t one there already
Double-click the data log object to display the General Tab Page for the functional object properties
Select the address from the data log address list, and double-click it or click the Display Parameter Button at the top right of the screen to display the Display Parameter Settings Dialog Box
Click the Set Button next to Line color to set the line color for the stored graph, to distinguish the stored graph read from the Memory Card from the graph of data currently being logged. In this example, No. 012 (red) is selected for the stored graph. If Step display is selected, the logged points will be connected by vertical and horizontal lines. De-select Step display to join logging points by the shortest possible straight line
Click the OK Button to return to the Functional Object Properties Dialog Box
Display the Time Axis Tab Page and set the graph time axis scale. In this example, “50” seconds’ worth of logging data will be displayed
Select Position end of scrolling at the center of data log graph when all of the standard data cannot fit on to the graph
Display the Icon Tab Page
Select Status under Icon
Select Cascade the read data to a graph under Options
Click the OK Button and transfer the project to the NS hardware

What are the operations to be performed on the NS hardware when externally controlling log start/stop?

The operations to be performed on the NS hardware are as follows:

Insert the Memory Card into the NS hardware
Start the NS hardware, which now has the project created using the procedures described in the last section. When SerialA: CIO00100.00 changes from OFF to ON, data is logged for 100 s (1 min 40 s). When SerialA: CIO00100.00 changes to ON, logging starts. When SerialA: CIO00100.00 changes to OFF, logging stops. To read saved data, press the Read File icon on the object while logging is stopped and select the desired file from the pop-up menu

How is logging data saved to the Memory Card and used as standard data?

The procedure for setting logged data as standard data is shown below:

While logging is stopped, make sure the data to be saved is displayed on the data log object, and press the Save to file icon. When the Save to file icon is pressed, the data is saved as a CSV file to the Memory Card/Log/Trend directory after folders for the displayed graphs are created. The output file name set for each group is used as the name of the folder. The saved data can be displayed directly as the standard data, but the file name can also be changed to make it easy to recognize as the standard data
Turn OFF the power to the NS hardware or display the System Menu, then click the Remove Memory Card Button in the Initialize Tab Page
Remove the Memory Card from the NS hardware
Use Explorer or a similar program on a personal computer to change the file name in the Memory Card/Log/Trend directory. Example: When the output file name for group 1 is the default

Before changing After changing Trd00@@@.CSV Stddata@.CSV (@@@: 001 to 999) (@: 0 to 9)

How many methods are there for creating CSV files and what are they?

There are two methods for creating CSV files, depending on the data log file output format set on the History Tab Page under PT – System settings:

When the data log file output format is set to Vertical axis: address, Horizontal axis: time
When the data log file output format is set to Vertical axis: time, Horizontal axis: address. Here we will create a CSV file for the data log graph shown in the following diagram. In this example, the data log file output format is set to Vertical axis: time, Horizontal axis: address (No. 2 above.) Simply swap the horizontal and vertical axis information in the following procedure if the data log file output format is Vertical axis: address, Horizontal axis: time (No. 1 above)

What is the procedure for creating a CSV file?

Use the following format to create the CSV file with the standard values:

#Comment Group name, log address A name, log address B name… OFFSET, logging start time Time 1, address A data 1, address B data 1, … Time 2, address A data 2, address B data 2, …

What are the notes related to creating a CSV file?

These are the notes for creating a CSV file:

A comment can be inserted in the first line of the file. When inserting a comment, put a hash mark (#) directly in front of it
When the logging start time is omitted, it will appear on the graph as January 1, 1970 0 (h) 0 (m) 0 (s)
When editing in Excel, set the cell format for the time to “Text”

What are the steps for creating a CSV file?

Here are the steps for creating a CSV file:

Start the spreadsheet software (commercially available)
Enter the time on the vertical axis, the address on the horizontal axis, and the standard data, as shown in the diagram.
1. For a sampling cycle of 0.5 s. #Group 1 standard data Group 1, Serial A: DM00000 OFFSET, 2004/06/21 10:00:00.000 00:00:00.000,0 00:00:20.000,60 00:01:10.000,60 00:01:40.000,0
2. For a sampling cycle other than 0.5 s. #Group 1 standard data Group 1, Serial A: DM00000 OFFSET, 2004/06/21 10:00:00 00:00:00,0 00:00:20,60 00:01:10,60 00:01:40,0
Once the editing has been completed, set the file name to Stddata@ (@: 0 to 9), make sure the extension is “CSV,” then save

What are broken-line graphs?

Broken-line graphs are objects that display in graphs current values for multiple consecutive addresses. Up to 256 line graphs can be displayed in one broken-line graph display region.

What functions can be used when a broken-line graph group is registered?

The Batch Read and the History functions can be used when a broken-line graph group is registered.

How do I set an explanatory comment for the pasted object on the General Tab Page?

Set an explanatory comment for the pasted object (up to 32 characters) in the Object Comment field.

What does the Data Block field do on the General Tab Page?

It selects the data block to be displayed. The Data Block Setting Dialog Box can be displayed by clicking the Register Button. Use this dialog box to create, change, or delete Data Block groups.

How do I set the number of columns to display on the General Tab Page?

Use the Display No. of rows field to set the number of columns to display.

What does the Switch field on the General Tab Page do?

It switches the field label.

What does the Copy Field Name to Field Label field do?

This field will copy the field name, which was set in the Data Block Group Setting Dialog Box, to the field label.

How do I set the codes and each field?

Use the Field settings field to set the codes and each field. The Label Name field sets a label name of up to 32 characters for the record label and each field label. The Width field sets the width for record and field label display to 0 or to between 16 and 800 (dots). If the width is set to 0, the labels will not be displayed. The Display Position field sets the horizontal alignment of the text in record or field labels to Left, Center, or Right.

What other text attributes can be set?

Text attributes other than the horizontal alignment (font, vertical alignment, font color, etc.) are set in the Text Tab Page.

What does the Display Offset field do?

It sets the offset for the display position of the field label name in dots (0 to 128). The offset is calculated from the leftmost edge of the field label name display area.

What does the CSV Import field do?

It reads the label name from the specified CSV file.

What does the CSV Export field do?

It exports the current label name to a specified CSV file. You can select the character code when exporting data.

What determines the number of fields displayed in the data block table?

The number of fields displayed in the data block table is determined by the widths of the object and fields. If all fields will not fit in the data block table, they can be displayed by using the horizontal scroll bar.

What does the Text Tab Page do?

It sets the text attributes (font, color, etc for the numeral values and character strings.

Where are the offset and display position set?

The offset and display position set in the Field Label Setting Dialog Box will be reflected in the numeral field and string field. The horizontal position set on the Text Attribute Tab Page will not be reflected.

What does the Background Tab Page do?

It sets the background color of the object and the record color. To fill the record, click the Set Button to display the Color Setting Dialog Box and select the color for the record. The selected line is displayed in reverse video.

What is the function of the Color of Top Column field?

It sets the background color of the column header.

What is the function of the All borders field?

It sets the entire border color.

What is the function of the Color of Odd Columns field?

It sets the background color of odd columns.

What is the function of the Color of Even Columns field?

It sets the background color of even columns.

What is the function of the Entire background Color field?

It sets the background color except for field label name and record data display areas.

What does the Icon Tab Page do?

It sets whether an icon button is displayed at the bottom of the object.

What are the functions of the icon buttons?

The icon buttons that perform operations can be displayed at the bottom of the data block object. The Read Data File icon reads data from the specified CSV data file, and displays it in the data block table. The Write Data File icon overwrites data displaying from the data block table to the specified CSV data file. The Read from the address icon retrieves data from the addresses set in Field Setting Dialog Box to the records selected on the data block. The Write to the address icon writes data selecting in the data block to the addresses set in the Field Setting Dialog Box. The Add the record icon adds a new record below the selected record. The Delete the record icon deletes the selected record.

What does the Options field do on the Icon Tab Page?

Check the items for which to display confirmation messages when a process is performed by pressing one of the icon buttons.

What happens when the Display confirmation dialog box when reading data file option is selected?

When retrieving the CSV data file, a dialog box is displayed. Click a button to select the source (PT or Memory Card). When this option is not set, the data file will always be retrieved from the PT (“Hardware”).

What happens when the Display confirmation dialog box when writing data file option is selected?

When writing to the CSV Data File, a dialog box is displayed. Click a button to select the destination (PT or Memory Card). When this option is not set, data will always be written to the PT (“Hardware”).

What does the Icon Size field do on the Icon Tab Page?

It sets the horizontal and vertical dimensions of the icon. (16 to 48)

How is the button size of the horizontal scroll bar determined?

The icon size and button size of the horizontal scroll bar are the same. When changing the icon size, the button size of the horizontal scroll bar will be changed simultaneously.

How are the confirmation dialog boxes (for reading/writing CSV data file) displayed?

The confirmation dialog boxes (for reading/writing CSV data file) displayed in test mode and on the PT are different. A Source/Destination Dialog Box is displayed on the PT, and a confirmation dialog box is displayed in test mode.

How do I set bitmap files or JPEG files for data block object icons?

Use the following method to set these files for icons.

Select PT – Data block Setting. The Data Block Setting Dialog Box will be displayed.
Click the Icon Button at the bottom right of the screen to display the Details Dialog Box.
Select the check box for the icon to which a bitmap is to be specified and click the Browse Button. The File Selection Dialog Box will be displayed. Specify the file to be displayed as the icon.
Click the Select Button to close the dialog box. An image of the selected bitmap file will be displayed to the right of the existing icon in the Details Dialog Box. Click the OK Button to close the Details Dialog Box. Click the OK Button to close the Data Block Setting Dialog Box.
Set the icons to be displayed on the Icon Tab Page of the data block object Properties Dialog Box.
Click the OK Button to close the Properties Dialog Box. The specified bitmap file icon will be displayed on the data block object.

What happens when the number of colors in the designated image file is a True Color number?

It is automatically reduced to 32,000.

What is the maximum number of characters that can be used for a file name and what characters can be used?

Specify a file name of up to 12 characters (8 file name characters and 3 file extension characters). The following characters can be used in file names: alphanumeric characters, underscore (_), dollar signs ($), and periods (.).

What does the Vertical Scroll Bar Tab Page do?

It enables/disables the display and sets the scroll width and button size.

What does the Horizontal Scroll Bar Tab Page do?

It enables/disables the display and sets the scroll width.

What does the Use Scroll Bar field do on the Horizontal Scroll Bar Tab Page?

Select Use Scroll Bar if a scroll bar is to be used.

What does the Use Buttons for Scrolling One Row field do on the Horizontal Scroll Bar Tab Page?

Select Use Button for Scrolling One Row to enable to a scroll button that moves to the right or left one row each time it is pressed. It scrolls to the right by one row until only the rightmost field is displayed and scrolls to the left by one row until the leftmost row is displayed.

What does the Use Buttons for Scrolling Multiple Rows field do on the Horizontal Scroll Bar Tab Page?

Select Buttons for Scrolling Multiple Rows to enable to a scroll button that moves to the right or left by the specified number of rows each time it is pressed. Select the number of rows to be scrolled from the options listed below. If the Rows in 1 Page option is selected, it scrolls to the right or left the displayed number of rows. If the Rows in 2/1 Page option is selected, it scrolls to the right or left the half the number of displayed rows. If the Specified Rows option is selected, it scrolls to the right or left the specified number of rows.

What does the Frame Tab Page do?

It specifies the color and size of the object frame.

What does the Write Setting Tab Page (Extension Tab) do?

It sets whether a confirmation message is displayed when writing a value to each field in the data block table. Any confirmation message can be set.

When is a confirmation dialog box not displayed?

A confirmation dialog box is not displayed if the Enter Key of the tenkey pad is pressed without inputting a value, or [ENT] or [RET] is sent from a command button. The address set for Turn ON the specified address When the value is written is also not turned ON.

What does the Password Tab Page (Extension Tab) do?

Passwords can be set when a field in the data block table is pressed. Five passwords of up to 16 characters each can be set. One password can be requested for each object.

What does the Control Flag Tab Page (Extension Tab) do?

Control flags control the input and display of the data block table. Use control flags to enable display or input when the status of an address turns ON or OFF.

What does the Macro Tab Page (Extension Tab) do?

A macro can be specified for execution when setting a value for a field of the data block.

When is a macro executed?

The Before Inputting Numeral/String trigger executes immediately after touching the field. The Before Writing Numeral/String trigger executes immediately after touching the field or pressing the Enter Key of the tenkey pad or keyboard. This macro is not executed when closing the tenkey pad or keyboard using the Cancel Key, Esc Key or Close Button. When a value exceeding the limit is set and an input error occurs for the numeral field, the macro is not executed.

What does the Size/Position Tab Page (Extension Tab) do?

It displays and sets the size of the data block object and the position from the upper left of the screen.

What is a data file and how is it created?

A data file is created as a group of records. The data block table retrieves the data from the file and displays it as record data. The data file is created in a CSV-format file.

What is the procedure for creating CSV files?

The CSV file for a data block is created in the following format:

Set the record label on the left of each line. Any character string can be set for record label as the record name. Up to 32 characters can be displayed in the data block table.
There are two types of fields; numeral fields and string fields. Select the data format for each field and set the field data.
- Numeral Field: Input numeral value using decimal numbers.
- String Field: Input any character string.

What are the restrictions on creating data files?

The CSV format must be used when creating data files. If a file is created using another format, data will not be read when using the data block on the PT, and data will not be displayed normally.
Set the same number of fields as that set in the data block settings on the CX-Designer. If the number of fields set in the data file is larger than that set for the data block settings on the CX-Designer, the PT will not read overflow data. If the number of fields set in the data file is less than that set in the data block, an error message will be displayed when displaying the data block, and the PT will not display the data block. Set the same number of fields in the field data as for the data block setting.
If ASCII is set for the string display type, the following codes will be used on the PT according to the language:
- Japanese: SHIFT-JIS Code
- Chinese (traditional or simplified): GB2312 code (Nothing is displayed because there are no corresponding characters.)
- Other: Latin 1 Code
If the user sets more than the preset number of records, the data exceeded that number will be ignored. Also, the data will be deleted when writing to the data file.
To write data to the data file, the record label and character string of the field are automatically enclosed in double quotation marks. Therefore, character strings will be enclosed in double quotation marks in the CSV file after writing. When creating a data file, it is not necessary to enclose the record label and character string with double quotation marks.
When putting double quotation marks in the middle of a string for the record label or a character string, follow these rules:
- To display double quotation marks (“), set two double quotation marks [””]. When two double quotation marks are set, one double quotation mark will be displayed.
- To display a comma (,) in the string, enclose the entire string with double quotation marks.
If invalid double quotation marks are input, an error message will be displayed when displaying the data block. Setting double quotation marks at the right end or the middle of the string causes an error. Set two double quotation marks, such as in [ABCD””] to display a double quotation mark.
If numeral data is set for a string field, the input numeral data will be processed as a string.
If data includes characters other than numeral values for a numeral field, the field will be processed as 0.
If the value set for a numeral field is out of range, 0 will be displayed.
If data including a decimal fraction is set for a numeral field, the following processes will be performed:
- Except REAL: Decimal position is not displayed. When writing to the data file or address, only the integer part is written.
- REAL: The number will be rounded off. When writing to the data file or address, the number before rounding up will be used.
Lines at the beginning of the CSV file that start with #COMMENT will not be read as part of the data log.

How do I select a record on a data block table?

Click the record number to select a record from the data block table. The record numbers are automatically displayed in the data block table. The selected record is displayed in reverse video and “*” is added to the record number.

How do I input a value in a data block table?

Touch the field for which you want to change the value. The keyboard or keypad will be displayed. Then, change the value.

How do I add a record to a data block table?

Click the icon to add a new record. The record numbers are automatically renumbered.

How do I delete a record from a data block table?

Click the icon to delete the selected record. The record numbers are automatically renumbered.

How do I edit record labels in a data block table?

Click the record label in the data block table to display a keyboard and input a character string.

What are the relationships between the CSV-format data file and the data block table?

Record Label: Read from the data file and displayed.
Field Data: Read from the data file and displayed.
Field Label: The field label name set in field label setting is displayed.
Record Number: Automatically displayed in the data block table.

How do I display the data block table on the PT?

Data is read from the data file to display the data block table on the PT. (When transferring screen data to the PT, the data file is also transferred.)

How are the data files written and read?

Using the and icons, data files can be written and read to/from a Memory Card or the PT. Select the source/destination in the confirmation dialog box for reading/writing. When writing to a Memory Card, data will be written to the file under the folder ”DBLK” automatically created on the Memory Card. When reading from a Memory Card, create the folder “DBLK” in the Memory Card beforehand and store the data file in the folder.

How do I save changes made in the data block table?

Be sure to write the data file to save any changes made in the data block table. If the screen is switched before writing to the data file, the changed values will not be saved. Writing to the data file is required to save the changes in test mode. However, if the screen is switched in the test mode before writing to the data file, the changed values before the screen was switched will remain.

Where is the data written when writing to the data file in test mode?

When writing data to the data file in test mode, data will be written directly to the CSV file set in the Register Data Block Dialog Box. Before writing data to the data file, make a backup of the CSV file to transfer to the PT.

How do I write data to an address?

Press the icon to write data to an address. When this icon is pressed, the record data selected in the data block table will be written to the address set for each field.

How do I retrieve data from the address to the data block table?

Press the icon to retrieve data from the address to the data block table. Retrieved data will be set for the record selected in the data block table.

What is the procedure for combining functional objects?

Use the following procedure to combine functional objects, such as command buttons and Numeral Display & Input objects.

What are command button data block control functions used for?

They are used to read and write data between a CSV file and communications addresses and to add and delete records from CSV files.

What does the Read data from CSV file to PLC Data Block setting do?

It loads the specified record data from the CSV file to the communications addresses set in the fields.

What does the Write data from PLC Data Block to CSV file setting do?

It writes the data at the communications addresses set in the fields to the specified records in the CSV file. Either overwriting the data at the specified record number or inserting the data at the specified record number is selected.

What does the Delete Record setting do?

It deletes the data from the specified record number in the CSV file.

What can the command button data block control functions be combined with?

The command button data block control functions can be combined with Numeral Display & Input objects, Character Display & Input objects, and other functional objects to edit CSV files or to display only the desired files on the screen.

What does the Read data from CSV file to NS PT Memory setting do?

It loads the specified record data from the CSV file to the specified address in the PT.

What does the Write data from NS PT Memory to CSV file setting do?

It writes one record of data stored at the specified address in the PT to the specified record in the CSV file. Either overwriting the data at the specified record number or inserting the data in the specified record number is selected.

What can command button data block control functions be used for?

They can be used to write and load data between PT memory and PLC memory areas.

What does the Read data from NS PT Memory to PLC Data Block setting do?

It writes one record of data stored at the specified address in the PT to the communications address specified in each field.

What does the Write data from PLC Data Block to NS PT Memory setting do?

It loads the data from the communications address specified in each field to the specified address in the PT.

What can command button data block control functions be combined with to display lists of record labels?

Command button data block control functions can be combined with list display objects to display lists of record labels.

What does the Read Record Labels setting do?

It loads the specified number of records from the first read record number to the specified addresses in the PT.

What are the restrictions on writing to addresses?

When writing data to an address, the data will be written one at a time and in order starting from the leftmost field. Time is required until the last field data is written. To switch the control using a data block, set the interlock for the PLC that confirms the last field data (rightmost field) is written and starts the control action.
While writing data to an address, other processes will stop. If a screen switch is specified while writing data, the screen will be switched after writing has been completed.

What do the NS-series PTs have that allows the date and time to be displayed or changed?

NS-series PTs have a built-in clock function that allows the date and time to be displayed or changed on the PT using date or time objects.

What are Date Objects and what are they used for?

Date objects are functional objects used to display or change the date of the system clock. The display section is a touch switch. A Settings Dialog Box (keypad) for changing the system time is displayed when this touch switch is pressed.

How do I change the date during PT operation?

Press the date object.
A dialog box for entering the date will be displayed.
Enter the new date. Regardless of the date display format, enter the date in yyyy.mm.dd format. (There is no need to add zeros.)
Press the ENTER Button.
The date will be set.

What is the maximum monthly clock error margin?

The maximum monthly clock error margin will be –39 to +65 seconds at room temperature (25°C). Adjust the clock regularly.

What should you keep in mind if the date object extends off the screen?

If the date object extends off the screen, the setting dialog box (i.e., the keypad) will also extend off the screen. Always be sure that date objects are completely within the screen.

What settings can be made in the Functional Object Properties Dialog Box for date objects?

General: Sets the date display format.
Text: Sets the font and size for date display characters.
Background: Sets the background color for date display.
Frame: Sets the object frame display.
Flicker: Sets the flicker display.
Write: Sets the contents of the write confirmation message when the date object is pressed.
Password: Sets the password to be entered when the object is pressed.
Control Flag: Sets enable/disable input and display/no display for objects.
Size/Position: Sets the object size and position.

What does the General Tab Page do for date objects?

It sets the date display format.

What does the Object Comment field do on the General Tab Page for date objects?

It sets an explanatory comment for the pasted object. (Up to 32 characters.)

What does the Switch setting do on the General Tab Page for date objects?

It sets the date display format for each label.

What does the Apply to All Labels setting do on the General Tab Page for date objects?

It uses the date display method of the selected label for all labels. Apply to All Labels cannot be set in the following cases:

When the Date & Time Display Format Check Box is selected on the Edit/Display Tab Page of the Option Dialog Box accessed by selecting Tools – Option.
When there is only one label.

What does the Use Large keypad setting do on the General Tab Page for date objects?

Select Use Large keypad to use a large Setting Dialog Box (keypad). A 252 × 268 dot (V × H) keypad will be displayed during PT operation.

What does the Text Tab Page do for date objects?

It sets the text attributes, such as font and color, for the date display.

What does the Background Tab Page do for date objects?

It sets the background color for date display from a selection of 256 colors.

How do I have a transparent background for the date object?

De-select (i.e., remove the tick from) Tile background to have a transparent background.

What does the Frame Tab Page do for date objects?

It specifies the colors and sizes of the object frame to change the shape or color when the button is depressed or raised.

What does the Flicker Tab Page (Extension Tab) do for date objects?

It makes flicker settings to make the object flicker (flash).

What does the Write (Extension Tab) do for date objects?

It confirms the write operation using a dialog box before the date is set. The confirmation message can be changed.

What does the Password Tab Page (Extension Tab) do for date objects?

A password can be set for when the object area is pressed. Five passwords of up to 16 characters each can be set. One password can be requested for each object.

What does the Control Flag Tab Page (Extension Tab) do for date objects?

Control flags control the input and display of functional objects. Use control flags to enable display or input when the contents of an address turn ON or OFF.

What does the Size/Position Tab Page (Extension Tab) do for date objects?

It sets the object size and position.

What are Time Objects and what are they used for?

Time objects are functional objects used to display or set the time for the system clock. The display section is a touch switch. A Setting Dialog Box (keypad) for changing the system time is displayed when this touch switch is pressed.

How do I change times during PT operation?

Press the time object.
A dialog box for entering the time will be displayed.
Enter the new time. Regardless of the time display format, enter the time in hh (24-hour clock).mm.ss format. (There is no need to add zeros.)
Press the ENTER Button.
The time will be set.

Example: When setting the time to 4:36:4 PM, input 16.36.04.

What settings can be made in the Functional Object Properties Dialog Box for time objects?

General: Sets the time display format.
Text: Sets the font and size for time display characters.
Background: Sets the background color for time display.
Frame: Sets the object frame display.
Flicker: Sets the flicker display.
Write: Sets the contents of the write confirmation message when the time object is pressed.
Password: Sets the password to be entered when the object is pressed.
Control Flag: Sets enable/disable input and display/no display for objects.
Size/Position: Sets the object size and position.

What does the General Tab Page do for time objects?

It sets the time display format.

What does the Object Comment setting do on the General Tab Page for time objects?

It sets an explanatory comment for the pasted object. (Up to 32 characters.)

What does the Switch setting do on the General Tab Page for time objects?

It sets the time display format for each label.

What does the Display format setting do on the General Tab Page for time objects?

Select the time display format from the list.

What does the Apply to All Labels setting do on the General Tab Page for time objects?

It uses the date display method of the selected label for all labels. Apply to All Labels cannot be set in the following cases:

When the Date & Time Display Format Check Box is selected on the Edit/Display Tab Page of the Option Dialog Box accessed by selecting Tools – Option.
When there is only one label.

What does the Use Large keypad setting do on the General Tab Page for time objects?

Select Use Large keypad to use a large Settings Dialog Box (keypad). A 252 × 268 dot (V × H) keypad will be displayed during PT operation.

What does the Text Attributes Tab Page do for time objects?

It sets the text attributes, such as font and color, for the time display.

What does the Frame Tab Page do for time objects?

It specifies the colors and sizes of the object frame to change the shape or color when the button is depressed or raised.

What does the Background Tab Page do for time objects?

It sets the background color for time display from a selection of 256 colors.

What does the Flicker Tab Page (Extension Tab) do for time objects?

It makes flicker settings to make the object flicker (flash).

What does the Write (Extension Tab) do for time objects?

The write operation can be confirmed using the dialog box before the time is set. The confirmation message can be changed.

What does the Password Tab Page (Extension Tab) do for time objects?

A password can be set for when the object area is pressed. Five passwords of up to 16 characters each can be set. One password can be requested for each object.

What does the Control Flag Tab Page (Extension Tab) do for time objects?

Control flags control the input and display of functional objects. Use control flags to enable display or input when the contents of an address turn ON or OFF.

What does the Size/Position Tab Page (Extension Tab) do for time objects?

It sets the functional object size and position.

What is the Machine Navigator function and what does it do?

The Machine Navigator function switches the display of strings and image files registered to screens based on the value at a specified address or on the occurrence or clearing of an alarm/event.

How are contents displayed?

Contents are displayed using contents display objects.

What are the three methods that can be used to switch contents when using the Machine Navigator function?

Switching Contents by Specified Address
Automatically Switching Contents When Alarm Occurs
Switching Contents from Alarm/Event Objects

How do I switch contents by specified address?

Make the settings shown in this table. The displayed contents switch when the value at the contents switching address changes.

Contents switching address	Contents No.	Contents
DM100	0	The battery … Battery.bmp
	1	The backlight … BackL.bmp
	…	… … …

How do I automatically switch contents when an alarm occurs?

Make the settings shown in this table.

Settings for switching contents	Alarm/event settings
Contents switching address: DM100	Link with alarm: ON
Contents No. when alarm does not occur: 0

No.	Displayed contents number	Automatically switch contents when alarm occurs	Contents No.	Contents
1	1	ON	0	(Not set.)
2	2	ON	1	The battery …
…	…	…	…	… … …

How do I switch contents from alarm/event objects?

Make the settings shown in this table:

Settings for switching contents	Alarm/event settings
Contents switching address: DM100	Link with alarm: ON
Contents No. when alarm does not occur: 0

No.	Displayed contents number	Automatically switch contents when alarm occurs	Contents No.	Contents
1	1	OFF	0	(Not set.)
2	2	OFF	1	The battery …
…	…	…	…	… … …

	Alarm/Event Display Settings
	Switching to the specified contents set with an Alarm/Event Setting: ON

	Alarm/Event Summary/History Settings
	Switching to the specified contents set with an Alarm/Event Setting: ON

What happens if the alarm/event summary/history object settings are made to turn ON switching to the specified contents in the alarm/event registrations and to turn OFF automatically switching the contents when an alarm or event occurs?

The contents will not automatically switch when an alarm or event occurs, but the contents will be displayed according to the selection bar in the alarm/event summary/history object.

How can alarm/event histories be used?

To use the alarm/event history function, follow these steps:

Make alarm/event history settings. When a screen is created using CX-Designer, register the bit memory as an alarm or event under PT – Alarm/Event setting. Make related information and other settings as required.
Initialize alarm/event history. If necessary, initialize the alarm/event history from the PT System Menu and clear old records before starting recording.
Execute alarm/event history. When bits registered as alarms/events turn ON or OFF during PT operation, a record will be kept that alarms/events occurred or were cleared.
Confirm alarm/event history records. There are two methods for checking the alarm/event history records:
- Check using System Menu. Alarm histories can be checked under the System Menu. The records can be displayed in the order the alarms/events occurred (sort by occurrence) or in the order of frequency.
- Check using functional objects. The records can be checked using alarm/event summary and histories created on screens. The records can be displayed in order of occurrence, order of frequency, or order of priority.

What is the format of the data stored in memory for alarm/event histories?

The following data is stored to memory for alarm/event histories:

Alarm number (ID)
Time and date of alarm/event (On-date & time)
Time and date alarm/event cleared (Off-date & time)
Time and date checked (Confirm-date & time)
Number of occurrences (On-count)
Related information value 1 (Val 1)
Related information value 2 (Val 2)
Related information value 3 (Val 3)
Message

What are related information values?

The related information values are the contents of the addresses set under Alarm/Event setting.

How can this data be saved?

This data can be saved as a CSV file to a Memory Card by turning ON system memory bit $SB33. Alarm histories are saved in a file called Alarm.csv and event histories in a file called Event.csv.

**What is the meaning of the following alarm/event history example:

Example: 1, 2000/02/24 14:55:13, 2000/02/24 14:58:21, 2000/02/24 14:57:34, 12, 34, 67, 89, “Alarm 1”?**

Meaning: Alarm 1 occurred on 2000/02/24 at 14:55:13, was cleared on 2000/02/24 at 14:58:21, and checked on 2000/02/24 at 14:57:34. This alarm has occurred 12 times. The contents of the addresses set to related information values 1 to 3 are 34, 67, and 89, respectively. The message for alarm 1 is “Alarm 1”. Event histories are saved in the same format as alarm histories, i.e., as CSV files.

What is the maximum number of alarm and event records that can be kept?

Up to 1,024 alarm records and 1,024 event records can be kept.

How can the number of alarm and event records be set?

Set the number of alarm and event records under PT/Alarm/Event setting/Alarm/Event Parameter on the CX-Designer.

What happens when the maximum number of records is exceeded?

If “Use Ring Buffer” is selected, the oldest data will be deleted and new data saved in its place when the maximum number of records is exceeded.

How can the set record format be checked?

The set record format can be checked under the System Menu.

How can alarm histories be checked?

Displays the alarm history from the System Menu during operation.

Select Special screen/Alarm history (sort by occurrence) or Alarm history (sort by frequency) from the System Menu.
Check the alarm history. (The event history cannot be checked.)

How else can the alarm history be checked during operation?

The alarm history can also be checked during operation by using an alarm/event summary and history functional object.

What is the data log function used for?

The data log function is used to register changes over time to the contents of a registered address. The data can be edited on a personal computer because it is saved as a CSV file.

What is the procedure for using data logs?

Perform the following procedure to use the data log function.

Make the data log settings. Register addresses under PT – Data Log setting when creating a screen with CX-Designer.
Initialize data log. If necessary, initialize the data log from the PT System Menu and clear old records before starting recording.
Execute the data log. Records address contents during PT operation at a specified timing. The data logging timing is set under Settings/Data log setting.
Check data log records. The data log records are displayed on a data log graph functional object.

What data is recorded as the data log?

The data listed below is recorded as the data log.

Group number
Date and time data 1st saved
Date and time data saved 2nd time… Date and time of data sampling
Data 1 address
Data 1 contents (1st log)
Data 1 contents (2nd log)…
Data 2 address
Data 2 contents (1st log)
Data 2 contents (2nd log)… Sampled data (by address)

What do data 1 and data 2 indicate?

Data 1 and data 2 indicate addresses registered under the data log settings.

How is the data log data saved?

This data is saved in CSV file format to a Memory Card when system memory bit $SB36 turns ON or the save icon for data log graphs is pressed.

Where is the data saved if it is saved as a result of $SB36 turning ON?

When the data is saved as a result of $SB36 turning ON, it is saved to a Trend@.csv file. The data for all registered data log groups will be saved to file if 0 is stored in $SW37. If a value other than 0 is stored in $SW37, only the log data for that group number will be saved to file.

Where is the data saved if it is saved as a result of the data log graph save icon being pressed?

If the data is saved as a result of the data log graph save icon being pressed, the data will be saved to a Trd@@.csv file. When the data is saved using the save icon, only the data for data log groups registered to the data log graph will be saved to the file. The CSV file name can be changed.

How can data logs saved as CSV files be read?

Vertical axis: Addresses, Horizontal axis: Times

Example:

Group1,2000/11/06 08:07:38,2000/11/06 08:07:39,2000/11/06 08:07:40,

HOST1:DM00000,7,14,21,

HOST1:DM00001,9,27,36,

What is the meaning of the following values in the data log CSV files example?

Group number
Date and time data 1st saved
Date and time data saved 2nd time
Date and time data saved 3rd time
Data 1 address
Log contents (1st, 2nd, and 3rd times)
Data 2 address
Log contents (1st, 2nd, and 3rd times)

Vertical axis: Times, Horizontal axis: Addresses

Group number Data 2 address

Group1,HOST1:DM00000,HOST1:DM00001

Data 1 address

Date and time data saved 1st time

2000/11/06 08:07:38,7,9

Logged contents 1st time Date and time data saved 2nd time

2000/11/06 08:07:39,14,27

Logged contents 2nd time Date and time data saved 3rd time

2000/11/06 08:07:40,21,36

Logged contents 3rd time

What is the meaning of the following values in the Trend@.csv and Trd@@.csv file names?

Trend@.csv

001 to 999 Beginning with 001, the number is automatically incremented by 1 each time the save operation is executed. After 999, the number reverts to 001.

Trd@@.csv

001 to 999 (001 to 099 if the output file names are 6 characters or longer) The ID number for files saved for each group. Beginning with 001, the number is automatically incremented by 1 each time the output operation is executed. After 999, the number reverts to 001.

00 to 99 Indicates one less than the group number (1 to 100).

What is HOST1 in the data log CSV files example?

HOST1 is the host name set in the Comm. Setting Dialog Box, which is opened by selecting PT – Communication Setting.

What is the maximum number of CSV files that can be saved each for Trend@.csv and Trd@@. csv?

Up to 999 CSV files can be saved each for Trend@.csv and Trd@@. csv. When this number is exceeded, the saved files will be overwritten in order beginning with 001.

What is the maximum number of records that can be kept for each group?

Up to 50,000 records can be kept for each group. The number of records is set under PT – Data Log setting on the CX-Designer.

What happens when the maximum number of records is exceeded?

The set ring buffer format is fixed for records. With the ring buffer format, the oldest data is deleted when the maximum number of records is exceeded and new data is then recorded.

How can records be checked during operation?

Records can be checked during operation by using data log graph functional objects. Open the screen on which the data log graph was created.

What does the error log function do?

The error log function keeps a record of macro execution errors.

What is the procedure for using error logs?

Perform the following procedure to use the error log function.

Make the error log settings. There are no settings required on the CX-Designer for error logs.
Initialize error log. If necessary, initialize the error log from the PT System Menu and clear old records before starting recording.
Execute the error log function. Errors that occur when macros are executed during PT operation will be recorded.
Check error log records. Error log records are displayed from the System Menu. The records can be displayed in the order the errors occurred (sort by occurrence) or in the order of frequency.

What data is stored to memory for error logs?

The following data is stored to memory for error logs.

Time and date of error
Screen number (−1 for project macros.)
Functional object ID (−1 for project macros and screen macros.)
Macro execution type

0: When loading a project

4: Alarm/Event ON

5: Alarm/Event OFF

10: When loading a screen

11: When unloading a screen

20: Touch ON

21: Touch OFF

22: Before inputting numeral and string

23: Before writing numeral and string

25: When changing numeral or string

26: When selecting a list

30: When Pressing a Display Area

31: When selecting an Alarm/Event
Error number (1: Program error; 2: 0 allocation error; 3: BCD error; 4: argument error)

How can this data be saved?

This data can be saved as a CSV file to a Memory Card by turning ON system memory bit $SB43.

What is the meaning of the following error log example: 2000/02/24 14:18:38, 0, 2, 20, 2?

Meaning: Macro executed when the touch switch for functional object with ID 2 turned ON in screen 0 on 2000/02/24 at 14:18:38 PM. The error occurred because of a macro zero division.

What is the maximum number of records that can be kept for error logs?

Up to 100 records can be kept. The set ring buffer format is fixed for records. With the ring buffer format, the oldest data is deleted when the maximum number of records is exceeded and new data is then recorded.

How can error logs be displayed?

Displays the error log from the System Menu during operation.

Select Special screen/Error log (Sort by Occurrence) or Error log (Sort by Frequency) from the System Menu.
Check the error log.

What is the function of the screen saver?

NS-series PTs have a screen saver function to help preserve the life of the backlight. This function turns off the backlight and clears the screen if there has been no operation of the PT for a set period.

What does the screen saver Display Erased function do?

If the screen saver Display Erased function is used, the backlight turns OFF at the same time as the displayed screen is cleared. Use the Display Erased function to help preserve the life of the backlight.

When does the screen saver operate?

The screen saver works only during PT operation. It will not operate during System Menu display.

How can cleared screens be displayed again?

Screens that have been cleared using the screen saver function can be displayed again by pressing the PT screen or executing screen switch from the host. Even if the position for a functional object is pressed, the first input will be invalid after the PT screen is pressed to redisplay the screen.

When will the screen saver function be released?

The screen saver function will be released if one of the operations listed below is performed by system memory or a macro.

Switch screen (automatic screen switch from system memory, macro, or because of alarm or event)
Opening, closing, or moving of pop-up screens (automatic screen switch from system memory, macro, or because of alarm or event)
Error (Error Dialog Box displayed)
Changing an Indirect Address (if the screen saver startup time is specified indirectly.)

How can the screen saver settings be made?

The screen saver settings can be made under CX-Designer system settings or from the System Menu. The settings include whether or not to use a screen saver and how long should lapse before the screen saver operates.

How can the screen saver be set using CX-Designer?

Select PT – System setting. The System Settings Dialog Box will be displayed. Select the PT Operation Tab Page.
Set Display Erased under Screen Saver Active and set the length of time in minutes (1 to 255) before the screen saver is started in the Set Value Field under Screen Saver Start-up Time.
Select the Indirect Reference Option and set the communications address if the specified communications address value will be used as the screen saver start-up time. Select BCD or binary as the type for the value stored at the communications address.

What value should be stored at the communications address if the screen saver start-up time is to be indirectly specified?

If the screen saver start-up time is to be indirectly specified, store a value from 1 to 255 at the communications address in the specified format. The screen saver will not operate if a value outside that range is stored.

How can the screen saver be set using the System Menu?

Open PT under the System Menu.
Set Display Erased under Screen saver operation and set the length of time in minutes (1 to 255) before the screen saver is started under Screen Saver Start-up time.
The allocation address will be displayed if the screen saver start-up time is specified indirectly. It cannot be set.

When can a PT buzzer be sounded?

A PT buzzer can be sounded to signal an emergency situation or a host error.

What determines whether or not a buzzer will actually sound?

The PT settings will determine whether or not a buzzer will actually sound. One of the following three settings can be made.

OFF: The buzzer will not sound.
ERR ON: A buzzer will sound when a message is displayed using the “x” or “!” icons, when an error occurs on the PT.
ON A buzzer will sound when a message is displayed using the “x” or “!” icons or an instruction is given from the host that turns ON $SB12 to $SB14, when an error occurs on the PT.

How are the settings for buzzer sounds made?

The settings for buzzer sounds are made under the System Menu. Set the buzzer sounds under PT – Buzzer sound under the System Menu.

How can buzzer types be controlled?

Buzzer types can be controlled only from system memory. Buzzer types cannot be set from the System Menu.

What are the three types of buzzers that can be sounded for NS-series PTs?

The following three types of buzzers can be sounded for NS-series PTs.

Continuous Continuous buzzer $SB12
Short intermittent Intermittent buzzer that repeats a cycle of sounding for 0.5 seconds and stopping for 0.5 seconds. $SB13
Long intermittent Intermittent buzzer that repeats a cycle of sounding for 1 second and stopping for 1 second. $SB14

What is the order of priority for buzzers when multiple and different types of buzzers have been specified at the same time by system memory?

The order of priority for buzzers when multiple and different types of buzzers have been specified at the same time by system memory is outlined below. The highest priority buzzer is listed first and the corresponding system memory bit is indicated in parentheses ().

Continuous ($SB12)
Short intermittent ($SB13)
Long intermittent ($SB14)

What are the three ways to make buzzers sound on the PT?

There are three ways to make buzzers sound on the PT.

Control from Host Buzzers can be sounded from the host if buzzers are set to ON under the CX-Designer system setting or the PT System Menu and system memory bits $SB12 to $SB14 are manipulated from the host during operation.
Error Buzzers Buzzers can be made to sound when communications or other errors occur during operation if buzzers are set to ON and ERR ON is set under the CX-Designer system setting or the PT System Menu.
Dialog Box Buzzers Buzzers can be made to sound when messages are displayed using the X or ! icons during operation if buzzers are set to ON and ERR ON is set under the CX-Designer system settings or the PT System Menu.

What are the methods for stopping buzzers that are sounding?

Buzzers that are sounding can be stopped using the following methods.

Turn OFF system memory bits $SB12 to $SB14 from the host. The buzzer will not stop, however, unless all bits for continuous, short intermittent, and long intermittent buzzers are changed to 0 (OFF).
Press a Command Button that has the buzzer stop function set to it. Bits $SB12 to $SB14 will turn OFF.

What is the clock function used for?

NS-series PTs have a clock function used to set and display the date and time. The clock function is backed up by the built-in PT battery.

What are the two methods for setting clock data?

There are two methods for setting clock data.

Setting from System Menu Display the menu for displaying and setting clock data under the System Menu and make the settings. The date and time can be changed under PT – Calendar Check under the System Menu. The date and time will change as soon as the new settings are input. There is no need to press the Write Button.
Setting from Functional Objects Make the time data settings using data and time functional objects created on the screen. The settings are input from the Date/Time Input Dialog Box. The date is entered in the yyyy.mm.dd format and the time is entered in the hh.mm.ss format.

What format is used to enter date and time in the Date/Time Input Dialog Box?

The date is entered in the yyyy.mm.dd format and the time is entered in the hh.mm.ss format.

What format should be used when changing time during PT operation?

When changing time during PT operation, refer to the table shown below and set the time.

AM	PM
Time	Input to the PT
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11	0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11	12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

How are external applications started?

External applications are started from the System Menu.

Display the System Menu, select the desire external applications from Special Functions on the Special Screen Tab Page, and press the START Button.
The PT will be reset.
The specified external application will be started after the PT restarts.

What is the device monitor function?

NS-series PTs have, as standard, a device monitor function that displays in a list and changes the contents of PLC words and displays error data (details of PLC errors).

With CS/CJ Series PLCs only, NS-series switch box files exported from the CX-Designer’s Switch Box Utility can be read to monitor or make changes to the data while viewing bit comments (using a Switch Box Screen). Error displays (such as details of errors in the PLC) can also be displayed.

What are the combinations of PLCs and communications modes that can use the device monitor function?

Only PLCs marked with “*1” can be used with the Switch Box Screens within the device monitor function.

Communications mode	Applicable PLCs
1:1 NT Link	C200HS-CPU21 C200HS-CPU23 C200HS-CPU31 C200HS-CPU33 C200HE-CPU32-E/-ZE C200HE-CPU42-E/-ZE C200HG-CPU33-E/-ZE C200HG-CPU43-E/-ZE C200HG-CPU53-E/-ZE C200HG-CPU63-E/-ZE C200HX-CPU34-E/-ZE C200HX-CPU44-E/-ZE C200HX-CPU54-E/-ZE C200HX-CPU64-E/-ZE C200HX-CPU65-E/-ZE C200HX-CPU85-E/-ZE CQM1-CPU4 -V1 CQM1H-CPU21 CQM1H-CPU51 CQM1H-CPU61 CPM1A-10CD@-@ (-V1) CPM1A-20CD@-@ (-V1) CPM1A-30CD@-@ (-V1) CPM1A-40CD@-@ (-V1) CPM2A-30CP@@-@ CPM2A-40CP@@-@ CPM2A-60CP@@-@ CPM2C-10@@@@@@-@ CPM2C-20@@@@@@-@ CP1L-L14DR-@ CP1L-L20D@-D CP1L-L20DT1-D CP1L-M30D@-@ CP1L-M30DT1-D CP1L-M40D@-@ CP1L-M40DT1-D
1:N NT Link	C200HE-CPU32-E/-ZE C200HE-CPU42-E/-ZE C200HG-CPU33-E/-ZE C200HG-CPU43-E/-ZE C200HG-CPU53-E/-ZE C200HG-CPU63-E/-ZE C200HX-CPU34-E/-ZE C200HX-CPU44-E/-ZE C200HX-CPU54-E/-ZE C200HX-CPU64-E/-ZE C200HX-CPU65-E/-ZE C200HX-CPU85-E/-ZE CQM1H-CPU51 CQM1H-CPU61 CS1G-CPU42-E(V1) (1) CS1G-CPU43-E(V1) (1) CS1G-CPU44-E(V1) (1) CS1G-CPU45-E(V1) (1) CS1H-CPU63-E(V1) (1) CS1H-CPU64-E(V1) (1) CS1G-CPU45-E(V1) (1) CS1H-CPU63-E(V1) (1) CS1H-CPU64-E(V1) (1) CS1H-CPU65-E(V1) (1) CS1H-CPU66-E(V1) (1) CS1H-CPU67-E(V1) (1) CS1G-CPU42H (1) CS1G-CPU43H (1) CS1G-CPU44H (1) CS1G-CPU45H (1) CS1H-CPU63H (1) CS1H-CPU64H (1) CS1H-CPU65H (1) CS1H-CPU66H (1) CS1H-CPU67H (1) CJ1G-CPU42H (1) CJ1G-CPU43H (1) CJ1G-CPU44H (1) CJ1G-CPU45H (1) CJ1H-CPU65H (1) CJ1H-CPU66H (1) CJ1H-CPU67H (1) CJ1H-CPU65H-R (1) CJ1H-CPU66H-R (1) CJ1H-CPU67H-R (1) CJ1M-CPU12 (1) CJ1M-CPU13 (1) CJ1M-CPU22 (1) CJ1M-CPU23 (*1) CP1H-XA40D@-@ CP1H-XA40DT1-D CP1H-X40D@-@ CP1H-Y20DT-D CP1L-L14DR-@ CP1L-L20D@-D CP1L-L20DT1-D CP1L-M30D@-@ CP1L-M30DT1-D CP1L-M40D@-@ CP1L-M40DT1-D CJ2H-CPU64 (-EIP) CJ2H-CPU65 (-EIP) CJ2H-CPU66 (-EIP) CJ2H-CPU67 (-EIP) CJ2H-CPU68 (-EIP) CJ2M-CPU11 CJ2M-CPU12 CJ2M-CPU13 CJ2M-CPU14 CJ2M-CPU15 CJ2M-CPU31 CJ2M-CPU32 CJ2M-CPU33 CJ2M-CPU34 CJ2M-CPU35
Ethernet	CS1G-CPU42-E(V1) (1) CS1G-CPU43-E(V1) (1) CS1G-CPU44-E(V1) (1) CS1G-CPU45-E(V1) (1) CS1H-CPU63-E(V1) (1) CS1H-CPU64-E(V1) (1) CS1H-CPU65-E(V1) (1) CS1H-CPU66-E(V1) (1) CS1H-CPU67-E(V1) (1) CS1G-CPU42H (1) CS1G-CPU43H (1) CS1G-CPU44H (1) CS1G-CPU45H (1) CS1H-CPU63H (1) CS1G-CPU42H (1) CS1G-CPU43H (1) CS1G-CPU44H (1) CS1G-CPU45H (1) CS1H-CPU63H (1) CS1H-CPU64H (1) CS1H-CPU65H (1) CS1H-CPU66H (1) CS1H-CPU67H (1) CJ1G-CPU42H (1) CJ1G-CPU43H (1) CJ1G-CPU44H (1) CJ1G-CPU45H (1) CJ1H-CPU65H (1) CJ1H-CPU66H (1) CJ1H-CPU67H (1) CJ1H-CPU65H-R (1) CJ1H-CPU66H-R (1) CJ1H-CPU67H-R (1) CJ1M-CPU12 (1) CJ1M-CPU13 (1) CJ1M-CPU22 (1) CJ1M-CPU23 (*1) CP1H-X40D@-@ CP1H-X40DT1-D CP1H-X40D@-@ CP1H-Y20DT-D CJ2H-CPU64 (-EIP) CJ2H-CPU65 (-EIP) CJ2H-CPU66 (-EIP) CJ2H-CPU67 (-EIP) CJ2H-CPU68 (-EIP) CJ2M-CPU11 CJ2M-CPU12 CJ2M-CPU13 CJ2M-CPU14 CJ2M-CPU15 CJ2M-CPU31 CJ2M-CPU32 CJ2M-CPU33 CJ2M-CPU34 CJ2M-CPU35
EtherNet/IP	CS1G-CPU42(-V1) CS1G-CPU43(-V1) CS1G-CPU44(-V1) CS1G-CPU45(-V1) CS1H-CPU63(-V1) CS1H-CPU64(-V1) CS1H-CPU65(-V1) CS1H-CPU66(-V1) CS1H-CPU67(-V1) CS1G-CPU42H CS1G-CPU43H CS1G-CPU44H CS1G-CPU45H CS1H-CPU63H CS1H-CPU64H CS1H-CPU65H CS1H-CPU66H CS1H-CPU67H CJ1G-CPU42H CJ1G-CPU43H CJ1G-CPU44H CJ1G-CPU45H CJ1H-CPU65H CJ1H-CPU66H CJ1H-CPU67H CJ1H-CPU65H-R CJ1H-CPU66H-R CJ1H-CPU67H-R CJ1M-CPU12 CJ1M-CPU13 CJ1M-CPU22 CJ1M-CPU23 CJ2H-CPU64 (-EIP) CJ2H-CPU65 (-EIP) CJ2H-CPU66 (-EIP) CJ2H-CPU67 (-EIP) CJ2H-CPU68 (-EIP) CJ2M-CPU11 CJ2M-CPU12 CJ2M-CPU13 CJ2M-CPU14 CJ2M-CPU15 CJ2M-CPU31 CJ2M-CPU32 CJ2M-CPU33 CJ2M-CPU34 CJ2M-CPU35 NJ101-1000 NJ101-9000 NX102-9000 NX102-1000 NX102-1100 NX102-1200 NX102-9020 NX102-1020 NX102-1120 NX102-1220 NJ301-1100 NJ301-1200 NJ501-1300 NJ501-1320 NJ501-1400 NJ501-1420 NJ501-1500 NJ501-1520 NX102-9000 NX102-1000 NX102-1100 NX102-1200 NX102-9020 NX102-1020 NX102-1120 NX102-1220 NX701-1600 NX701-1700 NX1P2-1040DT NX1P2-1040DT1 NX1P2-1140DT NX1P2-1140DT1 NX1P2-9024DT NX1P2-9024DT1

What does the host name display?

The host name displays the name of the host that is currently connected. The host connection can be set in the Host Selection Tab page.

What are the trigger settings available?

The trigger settings available are the trigger bit conditions and delay, as well as the sampling settings.

What are the options for Address Setting?

Address Setting sets the bit to use as the Data Trace trigger.

Press the and buttons to switch the data area.
The CIO, WR, HR, AR, TU, or CU data area can be selected.
Press the Address Field to display a tenkey pad.
Input the address to be monitored.
Addresses can be set between 0.0 and 32767.15, but be sure to input an address that is valid in the con-nected PLC.

What are the options for Edge?

Edge selects either ON or OFF (up-differentiated or down-differentiated) for the execution condition.

What are the options for Delay?

Delay sets the delay value between −1,999 and 2,000. The delay value specifies how many samples to offset the starting trace position from the point when the trigger condition was met.

What are the options for Sampling Setting?

Sampling Setting selects the sampling method. The options are:

Fixed-interval: Sets sampling at regular intervals (10 to 2,550 ms). The I/O data is sampled at each sampling period.
Every Cycle: Samples the data once every cycle. The I/O data is sampled after execution of the END instruction.

What does Operation Settings at Startup do?

Operation Settings at Startup displays Trace Start on Monitor/Run Mode settings when reading the configuration settings from a CJ2 CPU Unit.

What are the options for Addresses?

Addresses displays the word to be sampled.

To change or delete the settings, click the No. Button and select the bit.

What are the options for Word settings?

Word settings edits the word to be sampled.

Click the Up or Down Buttons to change the type.
Words can be set in the following areas: CIO, Work, Auxiliary, Timer, Counter, DM, current EM bank, and EM banks 0 to 18 hex.
The ten-key will be displayed when the address display area is clicked.
Enter the address to be monitored.
Addresses 0 to 32,767 can be set, but enter a value that is within the address range of the area in the PLC to be connected.

What does Settings do?

Settings sets the specified word address in the address list.

What does Delete do?

Delete deletes the specified address from the address list.

What are the options for Trace data size?

Trace data size sets whether to sample the specified address as 1-word data or 2-word data.

What does Address List display?

Address List displays the bit address of the bit to be sampled.

When changing or deleting a setting, press the No. Button and select the bit.

What does Bit Address Setting do?

Bit Address Setting edits the bit to be sampled.

Press the and buttons to switch the data area.
The CIO, WR, HR, AR, TU, CU, CF, DM, EM, or EM0 to EM18 data area can be selected.
Press the Address Field to display a tenkey pad.
Input the address to be monitored.
Addresses can be set between 0.0 and 32767.15, but be sure to input an address that is valid in the connected PLC.
If a CF address is being set, select the address from the displayed list.

What does Set do?

Set sets the bit selected in the Bit Address Setting Field in the Address List.

What does Delete do?

Delete deletes the selected address from the Address List.

What does Select do?

Select selects the host.

What does Host Name do?

Host Name lists the hosts registered in the project.

What is the process for Executing the Data Trace?

Before executing a data trace, the data trace parameters must be set in the Data Trace Configuration Screen. To execute the data trace, do the following:

Press the Start Button at the top of the PLC Data Trace Screen.
The data trace will start. If the trigger condition is met, sampling will start and the trace data will be stored in the CPU Unit’s trace memory. When the trace memory becomes full, sampling will stop automatically, the trace data will be read from the CPU Unit’s trace memory, and the sampling data will be displayed. The trigger condition can also be forced by pressing the Trigger Button.
To stop the data trace before the trace memory is full, press the Stop Button. In this case, press the Read Button to display the sampling data.

What does Start do?

Start starts the data trace.

What does Stop do?

Stop stops the data trace.

What does Trigger do?

Trigger establishes the trace condition and starts sampling.

What does Read do?

Read reads the results of the data trace. When the CPU Unit’s trace memory is full, the results are read and displayed automatically, even if this button is not pressed.

What are the options for Initialize Scale?

Initialize Scale changes the display scale of the X axis (time axis). The options are:

Initialize Scale: Displays 200 points on the screen.
Enlarge: Enlarges the display scale by one level.
Reduce: Reduces the display scale by one level. The display scale changes the number of displayed points in steps between 10, 20, 50, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, and 500.

What does Host Name display?

Host Name displays the name of the host in which the data trace is being performed.

What do the Horizontal Scroll Buttons do?

The Horizontal Scroll Buttons scrolls in the horizontal direction.

The < and > Buttons scroll by one point.
The << and >> Buttons scroll by one page.

What does Bit Addresses display?

Bit Addresses displays the specified bit address.

What do Vertical Scroll Buttons do?

Vertical Scroll Buttons scroll up or down in each graph.

How does Cursor Movement work?

Cursor Movement moves the cursor.

The < and > Buttons move the cursor by one point.
The << and >> Buttons move the cursor by 50 points.
Numeral input: Displays the cursor position (X axis). The cursor can be moved to a any position by inputting the corresponding number.

What does Status at cursor position display?

Status at cursor position displays the status of each bit address at the cursor position. The status is displayed as ON/OFF or 1/0. (The display format can be switched by pressing the Bit Display Format Button.)

What does Seconds/sample display?

Seconds/sample displays the seconds/sample at the beginning of the graph, the ¼ position, ½ position, ¾ position, and end of the graph.

What does Status Display display?

Status Display displays the following information:

PLC model: Displays model of the PLC performing the data trace.
Operating mode: Displays the operating mode of the PLC performing the data trace.
Trace status: Displays the status of the data trace. Displays the status in the format “Data Trace – XXXX”. Where the XXXX is one of the following:
- Offline: Disconnected from host.
- Idle: After the data trace was executed, it stopped without having the trigger condition met.
- Sampling: Executing the data trace.
- Reading: Reading the sampled data.
- Stopped: After the trigger condition was met, the data trace was stopped during sampling.
- Triggered: The trigger condition was met or the Trigger Button was pressed.
- Completed: Sampling was completed and trace data was collected in trace memory.

What does Word display do?

Word display switches to the screen displaying the word trace data.

What does Save CSV do?

Save CSV saves the result data collected from the data trace as a CSV file. For details, refer to Saving Collected Data.

What does Capture do?

Capture captures the screen and saves it to the Memory Card as a bit file.

The bmp file will be created on the Memory Card in the following folder: Memory Card\LOG\CAPTURE
The bmp file will be saved with the following name: screen_cap_XXX.bmp (XXX:001 to 999)
All numbers from 001 to 999 of the file number for screen_cap_XXX.bmp will be used, but if the Memory Card does not have enough free space, the file will be saved after the oldest file is deleted.

What does Word address display?

Word address displays the specified word and the color for that word. The I/O comment read from the PLC will be displayed when the I/O Comment Button is turned ON.

What does Cursor position status display?

Cursor position status displays the word address value at the cursor position.

What are the options for X axis display magnification?

X axis display magnification changes the X axis (time axis) display magnification. The options are:

X axis initial setting: Displays 200 points.
X axis enlarge: Increase the display factor by one step.
X axis reduce: Reduce the display factor by one step. The display magnification can be changed between the following number of display points: 10, 20, 50, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, and 500.

What are the options for Y axis display factor?

Y axis display factor changes the display magnification for the Y axis (value). The options are:

Y axis maximum: The display magnification depends on the setting for the data trace size in the Data Trace Configuration Screen. (The display format can be changed with the word value format.)
- One word: 0 to 0Xffff
- Two words: 0 to 0xFFFF FFFF F
Y axis enlarge: Enlarges the display magnification. Sets the display range to 1/2 the present value. The display can be enlarged up to 256 points.
Y axis reduction: Reduces the display magnification. Doubles the present display range. Can be reduced to the Y axis maximum range.

What does Vertical scroll button do?

Vertical scroll button scrolls vertically on the graph.

What does Graph upper and lower limits display?

Graph upper and lower limits displays the upper and lower limits of the graph.

What are the options for Word value format?

Word value format displays the number display format for cursor position status and graph upper and lower values can be selected from the following:

BIN (binary)
Decimal
Signed decimal
HEX (hexadecimal)

What does Saving Collected Data do?

Data trace data read from the PLC can be saved as a CSV file on the Memory Card.

Click the Save CSV Button in the PLC Data Trace Window. A CSV file will be created in the following folder on the Memory Card: Memory Card¥LOG¥Trace. The CSV file name will be called PDT_yyddmm_hhmmss.csv.

What does the CSV file contain?

The CSV file contains the following information:

No.	Item	Description
1	Date and time read	The date and time that the trace data is read are output.
2	Connection destination information	The host name and model name of the connected PLC are output.
3	Trigger conditions	The trigger settings made in the Data Trace Configuration Screen are output. The TIM/CNT Flag is always OFF.
4	Sampling conditions	The sampling conditions settings and trace data size settings made in the Data Trace Configuration Screen are output. The sampling cycle will be output if fixed interval is set as the sampling condition.
5	Data trace format	The display method for the cursor position bit and word values set in the PLC Data Trace Screen are output.
6	Sampling conditions/communications address	The first line is displayed is the sampling unit. The communications addresses for which data was traced are output to the second and further lines.
7	Trace data	The time (seconds) for sampling was performed or the sampling number is output to the first line. Communications addresses are output to the second and further lines. The output is performed in the format set for the trace data format.

What are the possible Error Messages Displayed on the PLC Data Trace Screen and their Corrective actions?

Message	Corrective action
T Failed to execute the trigger.	Check whether the connecting cable is connected properly.
Failed to read the trace data.	Check whether the connecting cable is connected properly.
Failed to start trace.	Check whether the connecting cable is connected properly.
Failed to stop trace.	Check whether the connecting cable is connected properly.

What are the possible Error Messages Displayed on the Data Trace Configuration Screen and their Corrective actions?

Message	Corrective action
S Unsupported setting data has been read. Please set again.	One of the following settings, which is not supported by the PLC Data Trace function, was read from the PLC. Correct the setting in the Data Trace Configuration Screen. Settings not supported by the PLC Data Trace function: <br> * A word address was set as the trigger address. <br> * The Sampling Setting was a setting other than Fixed-interval or Every Cycle. <br> * A word address was set as the address to be sampled. <br> * More than 16 bits were set to be sampled.
Bit is not specified.	The OK Button was pressed without any bits set for sampling. Set a bit address. The Delete Button was pressed, but the selected No. does not have a bit address set. Select the No. of the row containing the bit address to be deleted.
T Failed to read the trace setting area.	Check whether the connecting cable is connected properly.
Check whether the connecting cable is connected properly.
Failed to set the trace parameter.	An out-of-range bit address was set. Set an address that is valid in the PLC performing the data trace.
N Exceeding Maximum/Minimum limit	Set a number within the allowed range.

What can the Troubleshooter be used for?

The Troubleshooter can be used to check for errors and events that occur in the Controller or built-in devices and to access corrections for them. The Troubleshooter can be used only when you are con-nected to an NJ/NX-series Controller.

What are User-defined Errors and Events?

Errors and events that are defined by the user with the Sysmac Studio can be monitored. Corrections and other detailed settings can also be made. For details, refer to the NJ/NX-series Troubleshooting Manual (Cat. No. W503). For user-defined errors, the user can change to screens that are prepared in advance using contents objects from a Display Details Button.

What are Controller Errors and Controller Events?

Controller Errors and Controller Events are errors and events that are generated by the NJ/NX-series Controller system. These errors and events cannot be edited by the user. For details, refer to the NJ/NX-series Troubleshooting Manual (Cat. No. W503).

What are the Troubleshooter functions for the NX Series CPU Unit?

Troubleshooter functions	System Configuration Elements
Display error	CPU Unit Target*1 \
	EtherCAT Slave (Sysmac device) \
	EtherCAT Coupler Unit \
	EtherCAT Slave Terminal \
	NX Unit \
Clear error	CPU Unit Target*1 \
	EtherCAT Slave (Sysmac device) \
	EtherCAT Coupler Unit \
	EtherCAT Slave Terminal \
	NX Unit \
Display Event Log	CPU Unit Target*1 \
	EtherCAT Slave (Sysmac device) \
	EtherCAT Coupler Unit \
	EtherCAT Slave Terminal \
	NX Unit \
Remove Event Log	CPU Unit Target*1 \
	EtherCAT Slave (Sysmac device) \
	EtherCAT Coupler Unit \
	EtherCAT Slave Terminal \
	NX Unit \

*1. The CPU Unit does not display the error occurred on the axis of module for Motion Control with 64 or greater axes. Also the error occurred in the EtherNet/IP port is not displayed. *2. The EtherCAT Slave does not display the error occurred on the Unit with node number 193 or greater. *3. Some events of the NX Unit are not displayed. If an error occurs on the NX Unit that does not display event, an event indicating “mild fault occurs on the NX Unit” occurs and the Unit number of the NX Unit on that an error occurs is displayed in the attached information. *4. The errors occurred on the NX Unit cannot be cleared separately. *5. Safety Control Unit may require error reset with safety program. Refer to “the NX Series Safety Control Unit User’s manual (Z930-E1-04)” for the detail of error reset for Safety Control Unit.

What are the Troubleshooter functions for the NJ Series CPU Unit?

Troubleshooter functions	System Configuration Elements
Display error	CPU Unit Targeted \
	CPU rack \
	CJ Unit \
	EtherCAT Slave (Sysmac device) \
	EtherCAT Coupler Unit \
	EtherCAT Slave Terminal \
	NX Unit \
Clear error	CPU Unit Targeted \
	CPU rack \
	CJ Unit \
	EtherCAT Slave (Sysmac device) \
	EtherCAT Coupler Unit \
	EtherCAT Slave Terminal \
	NX Unit \
Display Event Log	CPU Unit Targeted \
	CPU rack \
	CJ Unit \
	EtherCAT Slave (Sysmac device) \
	EtherCAT Coupler Unit \
	EtherCAT Slave Terminal \
	NX Unit \
Remove Event Log	CPU Unit Targeted \
	CPU rack \
	CJ Unit \
	EtherCAT Slave (Sysmac device) \
	EtherCAT Coupler Unit \
	EtherCAT Slave Terminal \
	NX Unit \

*1. Displaying and removing the event (upper four digits of event code are 0000Hex) as error history inside the CJ Series Special Unit mounted on the NJ Series CPU Unit. *2. Some events of the NX Unit are not displayed. If an error occurs on the NX Unit that does not display event, an event indicating “mild fault occurs on the NX Unit” occurs and the Unit number of the NX Unit on that an error occurs is displayed in the attached information. *3. The errors occurred on the NX Unit cannot be cleared separately. *4. Safety Control Unit may require error reset with safety program. Refer to “the NX Series Safety Control Unit User’s manual (Z930-E1-04)” for the detail of error reset for Safety Control Unit.

What are three ways to start the NJ-series Troubleshooter?

To start the NJ-series Troubleshooter, use one of the following methods:

Select Trouble Shooter(NJ) from the Special Function Area on the Special Screen Tab Page of the System Menu.
Execute a Multifunction Object that is set to Switch Screen – Troubleshooter(NJ-series).
Set the Troubleshooter settings to monitor user-defined errors or Controller error. If monitoring is set, the Troubleshooter will be displayed whenever a user-defined error or Controller error occurs.

How do I start the NJ-series Troubleshooter from the System Menu?

Display the System Menu, select Trouble Shooter(NJ) from the Special Function Area on the Special Screen Tab Page, and then press the START Button.
The NJ-series Troubleshooter will be started.

How do I start the NJ-series Troubleshooter from a User Screen?

Set a Multifunction Object to Switch Screen – Troubleshooter(NJ-series). The host and screen that are displayed first can be set.
Operate the object (created in step 1) on a PT screen.
The NJ-series Troubleshooter will be started.

How do I start the Troubleshooter for User-defined Errors or Controller Errors?

Set the Monitor Target Error on the Monitor errors Tab Page of the Troubleshooter Setting Dialog Box to any setting other than Not to monitor.
Generate one of the errors that was set in step 1 in the Controller.
The NJ-series Troubleshooter will be started.

How do I quit the NJ-series Troubleshooter?

Press the Back Button on the screen that was displayed when the NJ-series Troubleshooter was started.
The display will return to the user screen that was displayed before the NJ-series Troubleshooter was started. Even if the NJ-series Troubleshooter was started from the System Menu, the displayed will return to the user screen that was displayed before the System Menu.

What does Back do?

Back quits the Troubleshooter.

What do the Tabs do?

Tabs change between the tab pages that display user-defined errors, Controller errors, user-defined event log, and Controller event log.

What does the Display Errors or Display Event Logs Button do?

The Display Errors or Display Event Logs Button switches between displaying errors and displaying event logs.

What does the Selection Button do?

For Controller errors, the Selection Button displays the function module screen for the host. For other items, it displays a list of errors and events for the host.

What does Host List do?

Host List displays a status list for hosts that are currently connected.

Press the scroll button to scroll the list.
If you press this part, detailed information on the host (i.e., the host name and IP address) are displayed in a window.

What does Back do?

Back quits the Troubleshooter.

What do the Tabs do?

Tabs change between the tab pages that display user-defined errors, Controller errors, user-defined event log, and Controller event log.

What does the Display Errors or Display Event Logs Button do?

The Display Errors or Display Event Logs Button switches between displaying errors and displaying event logs.

What does the Selection Button do?

The Selection Button displays the detailed event source in the Detailed Event Source Area for the specified event source. If you press this part, the function module name is displayed in a window.

What does Event Source display?

Event Source displays a status list of the function modules in the Controller.

What does Source details display?

Source details displays details on the event source for the specified function module.

What does Panel capture Button do?

Panel capture Button saves a BMP screen capture of the current screen in the Memory Card.

What does Reset error Button do?

Reset error Button clears all of the errors in the Controller that is currently displayed.

What does Status Bar display?

Status Bar displays information on the Controller that is currently displayed.

What does Back do?

Back quits the Troubleshooter.

What do the Tabs do?

Tabs change between the tab pages that display user-defined errors, Controller errors, user-defined event log, and Controller event log.

What does the Display Errors or Display Event Logs Button do?

The Display Errors or Display Event Logs Button switches between displaying errors and displaying event logs.

What does the Selection Button do?

The Selection Button displays a Details Screen for the error.

What does Error List display?

Error List displays a list of the current user-defined errors. Press the scroll button to scroll the list.

What does Panel capture Button do?

Panel capture Button saves a BMP screen capture of the current screen in the Memory Card.

What does Reset error Button do?

Reset error Button clears the errors that are displayed on the screen.

What does Status Bar display?

Status Bar displays information on the current Controller.

What does Back do?

Back quits the Troubleshooter.

What do the Tabs do?

Tabs change between the tab pages that display user-defined errors, Controller errors, user-defined event log, and Controller event log.

What does the Display Errors or Display Event Logs Button do?

The Display Errors or Display Event Logs Button switches between displaying errors and displaying event logs.

What does the Selection Button do?

The Selection Button displays a Details Screen for the event.

What does User-defined Event List display?

User-defined Event List displays a list of the current user-defined events. Press the scroll button to scroll the list.

What does Panel capture Button do?

Panel capture Button saves a BMP screen capture of the current screen in the Memory Card.

What does Save CSV Button do?

Save CSV Button saves the user-defined event log of the current Controller to a CSV file in the Memory Card.

What does Clear log Button do?

Clear log Button clears all of the user-defined events from the current Controller.

What does Status Bar display?

Status Bar displays information on the current Controller.

What does Back do?

Back quits the Troubleshooter.

What do the Tabs do?

Tabs change between the tab pages that display user-defined errors, Controller errors, user-defined event log, and Controller event log.

What does the Display Errors or Display Event Logs Button do?

The Display Errors or Display Event Logs Button switches between displaying errors and displaying event logs.

What does Category do?

Category specifies the event log to display.

What does the Selection Button do?

The Selection Button displays a Details Screen for the event.

What does Controller Event List*1 display?

Controller Event List*1 displays a list of the current Controller events. Press the scroll button to scroll the list.

*1. A maximum number to register Controller Event Logs is 2048 in NX Series, however, the maximum number to display logs is only 1024 starting from the newest log with this function.

What does Panel capture Button do?

Panel capture Button saves a BMP screen capture of the current screen in the Memory Card.

What does Save CSV Button do?

Save CSV Button saves the Controller event log of the current Controller to a CSV file in the Memory Card.

What does Clear log Button do?

Clear log Button clears all of the Controller events from the current Controller.

What does Status Bar display?

Status Bar displays information on the current Controller.

What does a Details Screen display?

A Details Screen displays details on an error or event. For user-defined errors, corrections for the error can be set and switching to a screen that was previously specified on the CX-Designer is possible.

What does Back do?

Back quits the Troubleshooter.

What does Meaning display?

Meaning displays details on the error or event.

What does Panel capture Button do?

Panel capture Button saves a BMP screen capture of the current screen in the Memory Card.

When is Reset error displayed and what does it do?

Reset error is displayed only for user-defined errors. This button clears the currently displayed error and return to the User-defined Error List Screen.

When is To details Button displayed and what does it do?

To details Button is displayed only for user-defined errors. This button changes the display to the screen that was assigned with the CX-Designer to the currently displayed error code.

What does Status Bar display?

Status Bar displays information on the Controller that is currently displayed.

How do I set a screen to display for the Display Details Button for User-defined Errors?

To set a screen to display for the Display Details Button for User-defined Errors, do the following:

Create an entry in the Sysmac Studio event table.
Copy the entry that was created in the event table to the Screen Setting Tab Page of the Troubleshooter Setting Dialog Box in the CX-Designer.
Press the on the Screen Setting Tab Page of the Troubleshooter Setting Dialog Box and specify the screen to be displayed when the To details Button is pressed.

How do I change the colors of the Troubleshooter screen?

The colors used on the Troubleshooter screen can be changed by specifying a file that contains the screen color settings on the Theme Tab Page of the Troubleshooter Setting Dialog Box.

How do I change the Display Language for Errors and Event Logs?

Set the languages to display on the Language Assignment Tab Page of the Troubleshooter Setting Dialog Box.

What is the function of Language setting for user troubles and user event log?

Language setting for user troubles and user event log sets the display languages for user-defined errors and event logs. Specify the language that was set with the Sysmac Studio for the names of labels for the NS-series PT.

What happens when Conform to the system setting is selected?

Select this check box to link the language that is used to display Controller errors and Controller event logs to the NS-series system settings.

What is the function of Language setting for Controller troubles and Controller event log?

Language setting for Controller troubles and Controller event log sets the display languages for Controller errors and event logs. Specify the language that was set for the names of labels for the NS-series PT.

How do you input numerals?

Two objects are used to input numerals:

Numeral display and input objects
Thumbwheel switches

How do you input into numeral display and input objects?

There are two methods for inputting to numeral display and input objects:

Input from a keypad
Input from command buttons

How do you input from a keypad?

In the numeral display and input property setting on the Keypad Tab Page, set either system keypad or large system keypad as the input method.
A keypad will be displayed during operation when a numeral display and input object is pressed. The keypad displayed for input will depend on the display type selected on the General Tab Page.

What are the different keypads that are available?

Decimal
Octal
Binary
Hexadecimal
Tenkey

What are the different keys available in the keypad dialog box?

Shows the upper limit for input
Shows the lower limit for input
Shows the value currently input
Clears the previous value
Clears the input value
Disables the input string and closes the keypad
Sets the input string and closes the keypad

How do you input from command buttons?

In the numeral display and input property setting on the Keypad Tab Page, set either Input from pop-up screen or Other Input method (e.g., Command Button) as the input method.
Create a Command Button with a key button function on the same screen or pop-up screen.
If Open pop-up screen has been specified, the specified pop-up screen will be displayed when the numeral display and input object is pressed during operation. Command buttons inside the pop-up screen are used to enter numerals.
If Other method (e.g., Command Button) is specified, numerals are entered using the command buttons in the same screen.

What are the command button settings?

Set Key button under the Command Button property setting on the General Tab Page.
Set Transmit to.
Set Transmit type.
- Select label string and set 0 to 9 and A to F to the Command Button labels to create a button that inputs 0 to 9 and A to F like a tenkey pad.
- Select control code and specify a control code to create BS and Enter Command Buttons.

How do you input decimal fractions?

Unit and scale must be set using the CX-Designer for decimal fraction input. The number of decimal points must also be specified.

Are there maximum and minimum limits for input into the NS-series PTs?

Yes, the NS-series PTs can check maximum and minimum limits when setting numeral input, to ensure that illegal values that may affect the system are not input. Errors are prevented because an error message is displayed if a value outside the range is input. The maximum and minimum input limits can be set when numeral display and input objects are created using CX-Designer.

How do you move focus in the numeral display and input objects?

In addition to moving the focus to a numeral display and input object by touching the screen, focus can also be moved using Command Buttons.

Set Key button for the Command Button to send a control code for moving the focus.

Can focus be moved automatically?

Yes, the focus can also be moved automatically to the right or down once the input has been confirmed, if the numeral display and input object is created using the table function.

What are thumbwheel switches used for?

Thumbwheel switches are used to input numerals by using the + and – buttons for each digit. The value for that digit will increase or decrease by 1 each time the + or – button is pressed. The changed value will be stored to the specified address each time the + or – buttons are pressed. Unlike numeral display and input objects, there is no button operation required to confirm the input.

How do you change signs using the thumbwheel switch?

If thumbwheel switches have signed display, the sign is changed each time the + or – button of the digit displaying the sign is pressed.

How do you input decimals using the thumbwheel switches?

To input decimals, it is necessary to use CX-Designer to set the unit and scale and the number of decimal digits to be input.

What are the limitations when inputting decimals using the thumbwheel switch?

Decimals can be input only when the display format is decimal.
The scale for a thumbwheel switch must be set to a power of 10, and the offset must be set to 0. If any other values are set, the thumbwheel switch may not operate properly.

Are there maximum and minimum limits when inputting numerals into the NS-series PTs using thumbwheel switches?

Yes, the NS-series PTs can check maximum and minimum limits when numerals are input (each time the + or – Button is pressed), to ensure that illegal values that may affect the system are not input. Errors are prevented because an error message is displayed if a value outside the range is input. The maximum and minimum input limits can be set when thumbwheel switches are created using CX-Designer.

How do you input character strings?

Character strings are input using string display and input objects.

How do you input into string display and input objects?

There are two methods for inputting to string display and input objects:

Input from a keypad
Input from command buttons

How do you input character strings from a keypad?

In the string display and input property setting on the Keypad Tab Page, set either system keypad or Large system keypad as the input method.
A keypad (virtual keyboard) will be displayed during operation when a string display and input object is pressed.

What are the different keyboards that are available?

Full keyboard
Decimal key (unsigned)
Hexadecimal key (unsigned)
Decimal key (signed)
Hexadecimal key (signed)
Decimal key (signed, with * and /)
Hexadecimal key (signed, with * and /)

How do you operate the virtual keyboard?

The operation of virtual keyboards is almost the same as a normal keyboard.

What are the different keys that are available in the virtual keyboard?

Closes the virtual keyboard.
Disables the input character string and exits the virtual keyboard.
Deletes 1 character from the immediately preceding character string.
Deletes the character string stored at the first word.
Inserts a space each time this button is pressed.
Sets the input character string and exits the virtual keyboard.
Changes the input mode to upper case when alphanumeric input mode is selected.
Changes the characters that can be selected to !, $, #, %, and other symbols. This does not affect upper or lower case for alphabet letters.

How do you input character strings from command buttons?

In the string display and input property settings on the Keyboard Tab Page, set either Input from pop-up screen or Other Input method (e.g., Command Button) as the input method.
Create a Command Button with a key button function on the same screen or pop-up screen.
If Input from pop-up screen has been specified, the specified pop-up screen will be displayed when the string display and input object is pressed during operation. Command buttons inside the pop-up screen are used to enter character strings.
If Other Input method (e.g., Command Button) is specified, strings are entered using the command buttons in the same screen.

What are the command button settings for character strings?

Set Key button under the Command Button property settings on the General Tab Page.
Set Transmit To.
Set Transmit type.
- Select control code and specify a control code to create BS and Enter Command Buttons.

How do you move focus in string display and input objects?

In addition to moving the focus to a string display and input object by touching the screen, focus can also be moved using Command Buttons.

Set a Key button for the Command Button to send a control code for moving the focus.

Can focus be moved automatically in string display and input objects?

Yes, the focus can also be moved automatically to the right or down if the string display and input object is created using the table function.

What are alarm/event summary history functions used for?

This section describes how to use alarm/event summary/history functional objects. Alarms/events monitor host bits and display messages for the user when the bits turn ON. Alarms/events can be used to record errors, operation start, and other events.

What are the main features of the alarm/event summary function?

The main features of the alarm/event summary function (current alarm display) are to receive notification of alarms/events and display messages set to the alarms/events and a list of when the alarm/event occurred and when it was cleared.

What is the alarm/event history function?

The alarm/event history function (alarm history display) displays messages set to past or current alarms/events and a list of when the alarms/events occurred and when they were cleared.

Where can you check alarm/event summary histories?

Alarm/event summary histories can be checked under the PT System Menu (histories only) and summaries and histories can be checked during an operation if an alarm/event summary/history functional object is placed on the screen.

Can the alarm/event histories be saved?

Yes, alarm/event histories recorded on PTs can be saved to a CSV-format file and saved on Memory Cards by turning ON system memory bit $SB33.

How are alarms/events registered?

Monitored alarms/events can be registered using the following dialog box.

Can you check the status of monitored bits and records of status changes during PT operation?

Yes, the status of monitored bits (alarm current/cancelled) and records of status changes can be checked during PT operation.

How do you check the status of monitored bits during PT operation?

Create a screen using CX-Designer and create an alarm/event summary & history object on the screen. Set whether the current alarm/event summary or history will be displayed.
- Select Display data/Currently Occurred Alarms to display the summary and select Display data/Alarm history to display the history.
Open the screen with the alarm/event summary & history object during operation. The alarm/event summary and history object displays the data recorded at that point. If the monitored host bit is turned ON, the message set to that bit will be displayed. Depending on the settings, the date and time the alarm/event occurred and was cancelled, the group number, display type, priority order, confirmation date and time, and number of occurrences will be displayed. The previous display is cleared if the same alarm occurs.
When a current alarm or event object is pressed, the alarm/event ID number can be written to the address specified at registration and switched to the registered screen.
To initialize alarm/event history data, either turn ON system memory bit $SB32 or select Initialize alarm/event history on the Initialize Tab Page under the System Menu.

How do the scroll buttons and icons in the alarm/event summary and history objects work?

Alarm/event summary and history objects have scroll buttons and icons allocated to them. Use the scroll buttons and icons to scroll through lists and change the display order.

What are the scroll buttons used for?

Scrolls up and down one line or a specified number of lines.

What are the different icons that are available?

Displays from latest alarm/event.
Displays from oldest alarm/event.
Displays from highest priority alarm/event.
Displays from lowest priority alarm/event.
Displays from most frequent alarm/event.
Displays from least frequent alarm/event.
Deletes selected alarms.
Checks selected alarms.
Checks all alarms.
Cancels all alarm’s check.
Changes display type (high alarm, middle alarm, low alarm, event).

Can recorded alarm history data be checked from the system menu?

Yes, recorded alarm history data can be checked from the System Menu.

How do you check recorded alarm history data from the System Menu?

Register an alarm/event. The procedure is the same as Checking without Stopping PT Operation, described in the previous section. (The settings are shared by all projects.)
Display the Alarm History Screen from the Special Screen Tab Page under System Menu. The recorded alarm history data will be displayed.
Alarm histories can be displayed in order of occurrence and order of frequency.
The method for initializing alarm/event history data is the same as outlined under Checking Without Stopping PT Operation.

What do operation logs record?

Operation logs record the following operation histories.

Functional object operation history
Screen display history
Macro execution history
Communications Address (Bit) Value Change History

Can recorded data be stored?

Yes, recorded data can be stored as a CSV file and saved to a Memory Card by turning ON system memory bit $SB38.

What system memory bits need to be turned ON for different operation logs?

Operation Log	System Memory Bit
Functional object operation history	$SB39
Communications address value change history	$SB39
Screen display histories	$SB40
Macro execution histories	$SB41

How do you save operation log data?

Operation log data can be saved by performing any of the following actions.

Execute a Multifunction Object set to save the operation log.
Click the Save Button for operation log on the Data Initialization Tab Page of the System Menu.
Click the Save Log Button in the Operation Log (Sort by Occurrence) Screen or Operation Log (Sort by Frequency) Screen.

How do you set up operation logs?

To record operation histories for functional objects, Record to Operation Log must be selected beforehand on the Write Tab Page (extension tab page) for each functional object when screens are created using CX-Designer. This enables records to be kept for the functional objects.

How do you check operation logs?

Display the Operation Log Screen from the Special Screen Tab Page under System Menu. The recorded operation log data will be displayed.
Operation logs can be displayed in order of occurrence and order of frequency.
Execute initialization of operation log data from the Initialize Tab Page under System Menu. Execute a Multifunction Object for which initializing the Operation Log is set.

Do NS-series PTs have a functional object used to set and display the date and time?

Yes, NS-series PTs have a functional object used to set and display the date and time.

How do you display the date and time?

Date and time objects display the system clock. The date and time can be displayed simply by creating these objects on the screen.

How do you display the date and time on the screen?

Create both date and time functional objects when creating screens using CX-Designer. Select any display format in the property settings for each.
The system clock will be displayed during PT operation.

Can the date and time functions be used to change the date and time displayed during operation?

Yes, the date and time functions do not only display the system clock. They can also be used to change the date and time displayed during operation.

How do you change the date and time?

Press the date object during operation to display an input dialog box. Enter the desired date. The input format is yyyy.mm.dd. Enter four digits for the year.
Press the time object during operation to display an input dialog box. Enter the desired time. The input format is hh.mm.ss. Enter the hour in 24-hour format.

Can you prohibit and allow PT operation?

Yes, instructions from the host can be used to prohibit and permit NS-series PT operation for the following functions.

System Menu movement (system memory operation)
All screen functional object input (system memory operation)
Input for each functional object (control flag operation)

How do you prohibit and allow system menu movement?

System Menu movement can be prohibited or allowed for NS-series PTs using the following method.

Prohibit/allow System Menu movement by manipulating system memory bit $SB3.

How do you control system menu movement using system memory?

Change the status of system memory bit $SB3 to prohibit or allow System Menu movement.

Action	System Memory Bit Status Change
Prohibit System Menu movement	OFF → ON (0 → 1)
Allow System Menu movement	ON → OFF (1 → 0)

How do you prohibit and allow input to all screen functional objects?

Input to the whole screen can be prohibited or allowed for NS-series PTs by changing the status of system memory bit $SB19 or the specified communications address.

How do you control all screen functional object input using system memory?

Change the status of system memory bit $SB19 to prohibit or allow input to all screen functional objects.

Action	System Memory Bit Status Change
Prohibit input to screen	OFF → ON (0 → 1)
Allow input to screen	ON → OFF (1 → 0)

If the screen is touched while input is prohibited, a password dialog box will be displayed. Input the correct password to enable input to the screen functional objects. $SB19 will automatically turn OFF. The password level is specified by system memory bit $SW13. For example, if the content of $SW13 is “3”, a level 3 password must be input.

How do you prohibit and allow input to all screen functional objects by manipulating specified communications addresses?

In the CX-Designer, select PT – System Settings, select the Touch Switch Lock Control Flag in the PT Tab Page in the System Settings Dialog Box, and then set the desired communications address.
Specify Prohibit Touch when ON or Prohibit Touch when OFF as the prohibit condition.

What are the different touch switch lock control flag settings during operation?

Prohibit/allow input	Condition	Communications address
Prohibit input	Prohibit touch when ON	OFF to ON (0 to 1)
Prohibit input	Prohibit touch when OFF	ON to OFF (1 to 0)
Allow input	Prohibit touch when ON	ON to OFF (1 to 0)
Allow input	Prohibit touch when OFF	OFF to ON (0 to 1)

What are the things to note about prohibiting and allowing input to all screen functional objects by manipulating specified communications addresses?

Unlike with $SB19 in the system memory, a dialog box for the password to cancel the input prohibit will not be displayed even if the screen is touched with input prohibited.
The Touch Switch Lock Control Flag has priority if both $SB19 in the system memory and the Touch Switch Lock Control Flag are used as input prohibit conditions.
Entering the System Menu by pressing two corners of the screen (or by pressing any corner twice for the NS15) is prohibited when input is prohibited using the Touch Switch Lock Control Flag.

How do you prohibit and allow input for individual functional objects?

Input to functional objects is controlled by control flags for functional objects on NS-series PTs that accept input.

How do you prohibit and allow input for individual functional objects?

When creating a screen using CX-Designer, select Control flag – Input – Indirect in the property settings for each functional object and set the control flag address.
Input can be prohibited and allowed by changing the status of the specified control flag address.

Action	Control Flag Address Status Change
Prohibiting input	ON to OFF (1 → 0)
Allowing input	OFF to ON (0 → 1)

What are some notes about prohibiting and allowing input for individual functional objects?

If disable is set using the control flag, no input from the PT to that functional object is possible during operation.
Control flags also have a function for displaying or not displaying functional objects.

What are memory cards used for?

Memory Cards are used for the following operations.

Transferring data.
Saving history files.
Saving data blocks.
Saving captured images.

What are the benefits of data transfer?

Data transfer enables screen data and system programs to be downloaded from a Memory Card to the PT and uploaded from the PT to the Memory Card.

What are the benefits of saving history files?

When history files are saved, alarm/event history, data log, operation log, and error log data is saved in CSV file format. CSV files can be edited on personal computers.

Can files be saved?

Yes, files can be saved from functional objects or by manipulating system memory.

What kind of memory card should be used?

Use a Memory Card recommended by OMRON. Operation may not be performed correctly if other Memory Cards are used.

How do you transfer data using memory cards?

Data can be downloaded or uploaded, either automatically or manually, when the PT is started.

How do you automatically or manually download/upload data?

Use the DIP switches on the back of the PT to make the automatic/manual and download/upload settings.
Start the PT.
The download/upload operation will start.

Can you manually download or upload data?

Yes, data can also be manually downloaded or uploaded using System Menu – Special Screen – Memory Card transfer.

How do you save alarm/event histories to memory cards?

Alarm/event history files can be saved by turning ON system memory bit $SB33 or by saving the data from the Initialize Tab Page on the System Menu. The file name will be Alarm.csv for alarm histories and Event.csv for event histories.

How do you save data logs to memory cards?

Data log graph object data can be saved to a file by manipulating system memory.

How do you save data log graph files?

Use the Write to File icon or save the group number to $SW37 and turn ON $SB36 to save data log graph files. The file name will be Trd@@.csv, and up to 999 files can be saved for each group. The output file name can be changed. If the output file names are 6 characters or longer, only up to 99 files can be saved in a folder.

File Name Component	Description
Trd	Fixed character string
@@	Indicates one less than the group number (1 to 100). The file name set in the Data Log Properties Dialog Box will be displayed. The default is Trd.
.csv	Fixed character string
001 to 999	The ID number for files saved for each group. Beginning with 001, the number is automatically incremented by 1 each time the output operation is executed. After 999, the number reverts to 001.
(001 to 099 if the output file names are 6 characters or longer)	The ID number for files saved for each group. Beginning with 001, the number is automatically incremented by 1 each time the output operation is executed. After 999, the number reverts to 001.

Files can also be saved by storing “0” in $SW37 and turning ON system memory bit $SB36. The file name will be Trend@.csv, and the logs are saved for all registered groups.

File Name Component	Description
Trend	Fixed character string
@	Fixed character string
.csv	Fixed character string
001 to 999	Beginning with 001, the number is automatically incremented by 1 each time the save operation is executed. After 999, the number reverts to 001.

The data log can be saved from the Initialize Tab Page on the System Menu. File names are the same as when using the system memory bit ($SB36).

How do you save operation logs to memory cards?

Operation log data can be saved to a CSV file by using any of the following methods.

Turn ON system memory bit $SB38 from the host.
Execute a Multifunction Object for which saving the operation log is set.
Save the operation log from the Data Initialization Tab Page of the System Menu.
Click the Save Log Button in the Operation Log (Sort by Occurrence) Screen or Operation Log (Sort by Frequency) Screen.

What is the name of the CSV file for saving operation logs to memory cards?

The name of the CSV file is Operat_yymmdd_hhmmss.CSV.

File Name Component	Description
Operat_	Fixed character string
yymmdd	Date when the file is saved (year, month, and day)
_hhmmss	Time when the file is saved (hour, minutes, and seconds)
.CSV	Fixed character string

How do you save error logs to memory cards?

Error log files can be saved by turning ON system memory bit $SB43 or by saving the data from the Initialize Tab Page on the System Menu. The file name will be MacroErr.csv.

How do you save data blocks to memory cards?

A file can be saved in CSV format by pressing icons on the data block object. When pressing the icon to save the file, the folder DBLK will be automatically created in the Memory Card, and the file will be saved in the folder.

How do you save captured images to memory cards?

Using the Video Control – Video Capture function, a captured image can be saved in bitmap (BMP) format. The file name can be specified in the property setting dialog box for the command button. When saving the file, a number from 001 to 999 will automatically be added in order to the end of the file name.

What happens when a video image is captured?

When a video image is captured, a file with same name as the captured image file and an extension of .mng will be created in the /LOG/Capture folder in the Memory Card directory. These files are used to manage numbers for file names. Do not edit or delete these files.

How do you setup the function key settings (NS15 only)?

Key status addresses can be set for NS15 function keys F1, F2, and F3. A key status address can be set as a project common setting (system setting). Settings can be made separately for each screen or sheet. Function keys cannot, however, be used in a pop-up window.

What are some notes about function key settings?

A key status address displayed on the PT screen can be set as only one of the following:
- Project common setting
- A sheet setting
- A screen setting
Application is determined by the following order of priority.

Priority Setting

High Screen setting

Sheet setting (farthest in front)

Sheet setting (farthest in back)

Low Project common settings
The function keys will not operate when the focus is on an input object.

How do you set up the key status address setting properties?

Select System Setting from the PT Menu to display the System Setting Dialog Box. Then select the Function Key Tab to display the Key Status Address Setting Dialog Box.

No.	Item	Description
1	Key Status Address	Sets key status addresses for function keys F1 to F3.

Can the function key tab be selected from another location?

Yes, the Function Key Tab can also be selected from the screen or sheet properties.

No.	Item	Description
1	Key Status Address	Sets key status addresses for function keys F1 to F3.

How do you display alarms when bits turn ON?

Example 1: To display Temperature error in red on the screen when the monitored PLC bit turns ON, regardless of what screen is displayed.

Allocate the bit to be monitored in the alarm/event settings and set the message as Temperature error. The red color code (12) must be set in the address set for indirect reference the background color using the PLC or macro function (=; substitution) when an alarm/event occurs.
Create a sheet and set alarm/event display as shown in the following table.

Setting Value

Frame None

Background Indirect reference (change background color at alarm)

Character color Black
Apply the sheet created in the previous step to all screens displayed on the PT.

What are some suggestions for displaying Temperature error in red when the monitored PLC bit turns ON, regardless of what screen is displayed?

Set the sheet created in step 2 to be displayed on all displayed screens, so that the message Temperature error is displayed.
Frames can also be used to achieve the same message display. Make the settings so that the frame page is switched when an alarm/event occurs and the text Temperature error is displayed.
A combination of ON/OFF Buttons to switch colors and the label switching function can be used to achieve the same display.

How do you change the whole screen to red and display a screen with the message Temperature error in black when the monitored PLC bit turns ON?

Example 2: To change the whole screen to red and display a screen with the message Temperature error in black when the monitored PLC bit turns ON.

Make the following property settings for creating the screen to be displayed when the monitored bit turns ON.
- Background color: Red
Create the following text for the above screen.
- Label: Temperature error
- Character color: Black
- Background color: No tile
- Frame: Frame and border set to OFF.
Make the following alarm/event settings.
- Address: Number of the PLC bit to be monitored
- Auto screen switch: ON (Select Switch Screen when Address ON.)
- Screen No.: Screen number for the screen used in steps 1 and 2 above.

What are some suggestions for changing the whole screen to red and display a screen with the message Temperature error in black when the monitored PLC bit turns ON?

When this method is used, the error screen will remain even if the monitored PLC bit turns from ON to OFF after the display has switched to that error screen. Once the device error has been checked, a Command Button for switching screens must be created or the system memory bits for switching screens must be manipulated to switch back to the original screen.

How do you display a screen with error details when the alarm message Temperature error is touched?

Example 3: To display a screen with error details when the alarm message Temperature error is touched.

Make the following alarm/event settings.
- Address: Number of the PLC bit to be monitored
- Auto screen switch: OFF (Do not select.)
- Screen No.: Number for the screen to display error details (Refer to step 3, below.)
Set alarm/event display on the screen as shown in the following table.

Setting Value

Background color Red

Movement when Alarm/Event is selected Select Switch Screen to the specified Page Set with an Alarm/Event Setting.
Register objects to the error details screen, as shown in the following diagram.
- Numeral display and input object that displays each temperature.
- Bit lamp for each object

What are some suggestions for displaying a screen with error details when the alarm message Temperature error is touched?

A ladder program must be written to turn ON the bit lamp for indicating the error position for each temperature at the same time that the temperature error bit turns ON.

How do you display a screen that provides a history of past alarms including the time of the error, when the Temperature error alarm message is touched?

Example 4: To display a screen that provides a history of past alarms including the time of the error, when the Temperature error alarm message is touched.

Make the following alarm/event settings.
- Message: Temperature error
- Address: Number of the PLC bit to be monitored
- Auto screen switch: OFF (Do not select.)
- Screen No.: Number for the screen to display error details (Refer to step 3, below.)
Set the alarm/event display on the screen as shown in the following table.

Setting Value

Background color Red

Movement when Alarm/Event is selected Select Switch Screen to the Specified Page Set with an Alarm/Event Setting.
Create an alarm/event summary/history object with the settings shown in the following table on the destination alarm history display screen.

Setting Value

Display data Alarm history

Default display order From New

Date & Time

How do you display the possible countermeasures for the error when the alarm message Temperature error is touched?

Example 5: To display the possible countermeasures for the error when the alarm message Temperature error is touched.

Make the following alarm/event settings.
- Address: Number of the PLC bit to be monitored
- Auto screen switch: OFF (Do not select.)
- Screen No.: Number for the screen that displays countermeasures for the error
Set the alarm/event display on the screen as shown in the following table.

Setting Value

Movement when Alarm/Event is selected Select Switch Screen to the Specified Page Set with an Alarm/Event Setting.
Create text that describes the countermeasure (e.g., Check the …) on the countermeasures screen. (Select Use as pop-up screen in the screen properties.)

What is the possible countermeasure if the destination address is incorrect?

Check the host information. The remote address where the host is registered is incorrect. Connected to a different PLC while online. Check the host registration and, if necessary, use CX-Designer to change the address.

What is the possible countermeasure if the operation mode is not in program mode or the cause of the error at the host side is not yet removed?

Change to program mode. Clear error on host side.

What is the possible countermeasure if writing to the AR is not possible?

AR is write prohibited. Select another memory area.

What is the possible countermeasure if writing in during RUN mode is not possible?

Change to program or monitor mode.

What is the possible countermeasure if force ON/OFF is not possible with this address type?

Select another memory area.

What is the possible countermeasure if connecting to this PLC model is not possible?

Check the PLC model and change to permissible PLC type.

What is the possible countermeasure if there is no project data?

Download the project data.

What is the possible countermeasure if the old password is not correct?

Use CX-Designer to check the password and input the correct password.

What is the possible countermeasure if the password input in the confirmation does not match with the new password?

Enter the new password again.

What is the possible countermeasure if data failed to save to the CSV file in a Memory Card?

Check the Memory Card. A Memory Card is not inserted or the Card is not one supported by the PT. Check to see if a Memory Card is inserted, replace it if necessary, and try to save the data again.

What is the possible countermeasure if changing the value is set as Disable so that the value cannot be changed?

Device Monitor value modification is disabled. Use the PT Settings Tab Page under the System Menu to enable changes to the values.

What is the possible countermeasure if changing the value is set as Disable so that the Mode cannot be changed?

Device Monitor value modification is disabled. Use the PT Settings Tab Page under the System Menu to enable changes to the values.

What is the possible countermeasure if you failed to delete the file?

The file is a read-only file. Clear the read-only setting.

What is the possible countermeasure if there is a printer error?

The printer cable is not connected, the printer power is OFF, or a printer error occurred. Make sure the cable is properly connected and the power is ON. Eliminate any printer hardware errors, such as an empty paper tray or empty ink cartridge.

What is the possible countermeasure if you failed to stop the Memory Card?

The Remove Button was pressed while the Memory Card was being accessed. Wait until the Memory Card stops being accessed, and then press the Remove Button again to remove the Memory Card.

What are the communications errors and countermeasures?

This section describes the communications errors that may occur during operation and possible countermeasures. Refer to 5-2-9 Troubleshooting Errors with EtherNet/IP Communications.

How does a PT operate when errors occur?

An error message is displayed on the PT when an error occurs, and a buzzer will sound if Buzzer sound under the System Menu is set to ON or ERR ON. Error messages are displayed when Communications auto return is turned OFF under the System Menu.

What should a user do when errors occur?

Check the error message displayed and press the OK Button. When the OK Button is pressed, the screen before the communications error will be returned and operation will restart. Alternatively, the display may automatically switch to the System Menu. Check the settings under the System Menu and change if necessary.

What information is displayed depending on the error?

Screen No.: Screen number Allocated host: Host name MRES: Main response code SRES: Sub-response code

What happens if Communications auto return is set to ON and an error occurs at one port while both ports are being used?

The other port will continue communications.

What happens when a communications error occurs?

Press the OK Button in the error message to return the original screen. The numeral and other data on the original screen will be the data from before the error occurred.

What is the possible countermeasure if an addressing error exists in the screen, alarm, data log, or macro?

Correct address setting by the CX-Designer.

What should you do if the set address is invalid?

Press the OK Button to move to the System Menu.
Check the communications settings under data check, in particular that the address is valid.
Use CX-Designer to change the settings.

What are the possible causes and countermeasures for a time-out error that occurs while downloading?

Cause	Countermeasure
Disconnection of the connecting cable.	Check the cable connection and conduct a continuity test. Exchange the cable if there is a cable error. If necessary, rewire the cable.
Stopped host	The host communications service has stopped.
Incorrect time-out period.	The timeout monitor time is too short.
The communications cable is not connected properly.	Check the cable connection and conduct a continuity test. Exchange the cable if there is a cable error. If necessary, rewire the cable.
The host communications service has stopped.	Adjust the system service execution time in the host to create unused time between task execution.
The timeout monitor time is too short.	Check the communications settings in the Unit and set them to enable using Ethernet.
NS internal communication load has become high (Communications auto return is ON)	The load of EtherNet/IP communication processing inside NS is high and normal communications are damaged. Restart the NS unit. If the communication auto return setting is ON, NS will be restarted automatically after 1 minute. If it occurs repeatedly after rebooting the NS, please review the system configuration and screen configuration to reduce the communication load.
NS internal communication load has become high (Communications auto return is OFF)	NS will be rebooted after 1 minute. Press the OK button to restart immediately.

What are the possible causes and countermeasures for a communication error detected while downloading?

Cause	Countermeasure
Data corrupted by noise.	Check the cable connection and conduct a continuity test. Exchange the cable if there is a cable error. If necessary, rewire the cable.
Invalid host communications command.	Check the cable connection and conduct a continuity test. Exchange the cable if there is a cable error. If necessary, rewire the cable.
(Writing disabled.)	* The number of elements does not agree with the write data size.

The write start address exceeds the range of the variable area.
The write end position exceeds the range of the variable area. Confirm the range that can be processed and set the write operation within that range.

What is the possible countermeasure if an addressing error exists in the screen, alarm, data log, or macro?

Correct address setting by the CX-Designer.

What should you do if an illegal address is set?

Press the OK Button to go to the System Menu. Select Data Check to see whether the address is valid and the communications settings are correct. Use CX-Designer to change settings if necessary.

What are the possible causes and countermeasures for a communication error detected while uploading?

Cause	Countermeasure
Data corrupted by noise	Check the cable connection and conduct a continuity test. Replace the cable if there is a cable error, or rewire the cable if necessary.
Invalid host communications command	Check the cable connection and conduct a continuity test. Replace the cable if there is a cable error, or rewire the cable if necessary.
(Writing disabled.)	* One of the specified EM Area banks does not exist.

The relevant part of the EM Area has been converted to file memory. Set the correct code, referring to information on the command variables and parameter type codes.
The read start address exceeds the range of the variable area.
The specified read exceeds the maximum value. Confirm the range that can be processed and set the read operation within that range.

What is the possible countermeasure if you failed to read host registration?

Correct host registration with CX-Designer. Then, press OK and then download project data.

What is the possible countermeasure if project data cannot be downloaded?

Use a Programming Device to repair the data and try to download it again.

What are the possible causes and countermeasures for a time-out error that occurred while writing?

Cause	Countermeasure
The communications cable is not properly connected.	Check the cable connection and conduct a continuity test. Replace the cable if there is a cable error, or rewire the cable if necessary.
The host communications service has stopped.	Adjust the system service execution time in the host to create unused time between task execution.
The timeout monitoring time is too short.	Check the communications settings in the Unit and set them to enable using Ethernet.
The relevant part of the EM Area has been converted to file memory.	* The number of elements does not agree with the write data size.

The write start address exceeds the range of the variable area.
The write end position exceeds the range of the variable area. Confirm the range that can be processed and set the write operation within that range.

What are the possible causes and countermeasures for a communication error that was detected while writing?

Cause	Countermeasure
Data corrupted by noise	Check the cable connection and conduct a continuity test. Replace the cable if there is a cable error, or rewire the cable if necessary.
Invalid host communications command	Check the cable connection and conduct a continuity test. Replace the cable if there is a cable error, or rewire the cable if necessary.
(Writing disabled.)	* The relevant part of the EM Area has been converted to file memory.

The specified EM Area bank does not exist.
The variable type specification is not valid. Set the correct code, referring to information on the command variables and parameter type codes.
Write-protected words are included in the write area. If write protection is set with a switch, release the protection and execute the instruction again. Execution is not possible for read-only areas.
FINS write protection is in effect. Clear protection from Support Software and execute the instruction again.

What is the possible countermeasure if the storage type of the number set for a functional object does not match the data type of the tag?

Change the settings using the CX-Designer. Alternatively, change the host tag settings. If you transfer a screen by the Select Update Screen button using a transfer program, tag settings may be inconsistent and an allocation address may turn to be ???. If it happens, transfer an entire project, or transfer the screen from CX Designer to send the tag settings again.

What is the possible countermeasure if settings are made to monitor data that exceeds the maximum number of elements for an array variable?

What are the probable causes and possible countermeasures for errors?

Errors	Suggested cause as displayed	Possible countermeasure
Local node error (MRES:01)	Local node not connected to network (SRES:01).	Connect the node to the network.
	No token received (SRES:02).	Set the local node within the maximum node address range.
	Cannot send because number of retries exceeded (SRES:03).	If tests executed between nodes do not operate normally, check the operating environment again.
	Cannot send because allowable number of frames exceeded (SRES:04).	Check the status of the event executed in the network and reduce the number of events in one cycle. Alternatively, increase the number of frames allowed to be sent.
	Node address setting incorrect (SRES:05).	Make the correct rotary switch settings. Make sure the node address is not outside the specified range and is not duplicated.
	Node address duplicated in network (SRES:06).	Change the duplicated node address.
Destination node errors (MRES:02)	Remote node not connected to network (SRES:01).	Connect the remote node to the network.
	No Unit for the unit address (SRES:02).	Check the remote unit address.
	No third node (SRES:03).	Check the address for the unit used as the third node. Check the third node address in the CMND instruction send data.
	Broadcast specified (SRES:03).	Specify only one node as the third node.
	Reception concentrated at remote node (SRES:04).	Increase the number of retries or redesign the system so that there is not concentration at the remote node.
	Message frame broken (SRES:05).	Increase the number of set retries. Perform an internode test to check the noise status.
	Response monitor time too short (SRES:05).	Increase the response monitor time parameters.
	Send/receive frame discarded (SRES:05).	Check the error history and take the correct action.
	Parity error, BBC error, or similar error has occurred (SRES:06).	Set the maximum unit number to 1 or higher for NT Link mode in the PLC Setup.
Controller error (MRES:03)	Communications controller error (SRES:01).	Refer to the Unit and Board user’s manuals and take the correct action.
	CPU error on remote node CPU Unit. (SRES:02)	Refer to the CPU Unit manual and remove the cause of the CPU Unit error.
	No response returned because of Board error (SRES:03).	Check the network communications status and restart the Board. If the error persists, replace the Board.
	Incorrect Unit number setting (SRES:04)	Make the correct rotary switch settings. Make sure the Unit number is not outside the specified range and is not duplicated.
Service unsupporte d (MRES:04)	The Unit or Board do not support the command code used (SRES:01).	Check the command code.
	Command cannot be executed because the model or version is different (SRES:02).	Check the model and version.
Routing table error (MRES:05)	No destination address set on routing table (SRES:01).	Set the destination address on the routing table.
	Destination unclear because there is no routing table (SRES:02).	Set routing tables to the source, destination, and relay nodes.
	Routing table error (SRES:03).	Make the correct routing table settings.
	Command used more than 3 levels (SRES:04).	Edit the network or change the routing tables so that the command uses 3 or fewer levels.
Command format error (MRES:10)	Command too long (SRES:01).	Check the command format and set the correct command data.
	Command too short (SRES:02).	Check the command format and set the correct command data.
	The specified number of elements and the number of data to write do not match (SRES:03).	Check and match the number of nodes and the number of data writes.
	Different format (SRES:04).	Check the command format and set the correct command data.
	Local node relay table or relay node local network table settings incorrect (SRES:05).	Make the correct routing table settings.
Parameter error (MRES:11)	No corresponding variable code or EM (SRES:01).	Check command variables and parameter codes and set the corresponding code.
	Different access size specification or odd start address specified (SRES:02).	Check the variable and parameter access sizes and set the correct access size.
	Start address in processing range for command is in access-prohibited area (SRES:03).	Check the allowable processing range and set the processing range within the allowable range.
	End position in processing range for command is outside allowable processing range (SRES:04).	Check the allowable processing range and set the processing range within the allowable range.
	Total number of words exceeds limit (SRES:04).	Make the correct data link table settings.
	Non-existent program number set (SRES:05).	Check the valid program numbers and make the correct size relationship settings.
	Incorrect size relationship for command elements (SRES:09).	Check the command data and set the correct size relationships.
	Node not set in common link parameters is set in refresh parameters (SRES:09).	Make the correct data link table settings.
	Tried to execute derivative monitor during data trace or tried to execute data trace during derivative monitoring. (SRES:0A)	Abort the current processing or wait until it has been completed and then execute the command.
	Duplicate node address. (SRES:0A)	Make the correct data link table settings.
	Response exceeds maximum response length (SRES:0B).	Check the command format and set the correct number of elements.
	Error in set parameters (SRES:0C).	Check the command data and set the correct parameters.
	Error in file (SRES:0C).	Check file contents.
Read not possible (MRES:20)	Cannot access because read-only area. (SRES:01)	If write protected by switch settings, remove the protection and re-execute the command. Write commands cannot be executed for write-prohibited areas.
	Program area protected. (SRES:02)	Use support software to remove the protection and re-execute the command.
	No registered tables (SRES:03).	Set tables.
	Table error (SRES:03).	Make the correct table settings.
	No data to match search data (SRES:04).	——
	Non-existent program number set (SRES:05).	Check valid program numbers and set valid number.
	No corresponding file on specified file device (SRES: 06).	Check that the file name, including the subdirectory, is correct.
	Mismatched data in data being verified (SRES:07).	Check memory contents and write the correct data.
	File read failed (SRES:07).	Check file contents.
Write not possible (MRES:21)	Program area protected (SRES:02).	Use support software to remove the protection and re-execute the command.
	Write prohibited due to automatic data link table settings (SRES:02).	Change the system settings to allow any data link table settings.
	Tried to create file when number of files that can be registered has been exceeded (SRES:03).	Delete unnecessary files and then create a new file or create memory area for new files.
	Tried to open too many files for system limits (SRES:03).	Close open files and then re-execute the command.
	Non-existent program number set (SRES:05).	Check valid program numbers and set valid number.
	No corresponding file on specified file device (SRES: 06).	Check file name and re-execute command.
	Same file already on specified file device (SRES:07).	Change the write file name and re-execute the command.
	Cannot change because change caused error. (SRES:08)	——
Not executable in current mode (MRES:22)	The mode is incorrect (SRES:01).	Check operating mode.
	Cannot execute because data link starting (SRES:01)	Check the data link startup status.
	Cannot execute because data link stopped (SRES:02).	Check the data link startup status.
	Different command operating mode (program mode) (SRES:03).	Check PLC and FA computer operating mode.
	Different command operating mode (debug mode) (SRES:04).	Check PLC and FA computer operating mode.
	Different command operating mode (monitor mode) (SRES:05).	Check PLC and FA computer operating mode.
	Different command operating mode (run mode) (SRES:06).	Check PLC and FA computer operating mode.
	Not polling node (SRES:07)	Check the polling node on the network.
	Different command operating mode (SRES:08).	Check active status of the step.
No such device Unit (MRES:23)	No memory (media) for file device (SRES:01).	Mount memory (media). Alternatively, format EM.
	No file memory (SRES:02).	Check that file memory is mounted.
	No clock (SRES:03).	Check the model.
Cannot start/stop (MRES:24)	Data link table not registered or data link table error (SRES:01).	Make the data link table settings.
Unit error (MRES:25)	Memory error (SRES:02)	Resend correct data to memory.
	Registered I/O and actual I/O configurations different (SRES:03).	Change the actual configuration to match the registered configuration or create the I/O tables again.
	Registered number of I/O points or remote I/O points exceeded (SRES:04).	Change the registered number of points so that it will not be exceeded.
	Data transfer error between CPU and CPU Bus Unit (SRES:05).	Check that the Unit, Board, and cable are connected correctly and execute the ERROR CLEAR command.
	Duplicate number in rack or Unit numbers or I/O address settings under system settings (SRES:06).	Check the system settings and change any duplicate numbers.
	Data transfer error between CPU and I/O Unit. (SRES:07)	Check that the Unit, Board, and cable are connected correctly and execute the ERROR CLEAR command.
	SYSMAC BUS/2 data transfer error. (SRES:09)	Check that the Unit, Board, and cable are connected correctly and execute the Clear error command.
	CPU Bus Unit data transfer error. (SRES:0A)	Check that the Unit, Board, and cable are connected correctly and execute the Clear error command.
	Duplicate word settings (SRES:0D).	Verify I/O table data and reset I/O words.
	Error during error check of internal memory, Memory Card, or EM file memory (SRES:0F).	* For internal memory errors, write the correct data and re-execute the command.

Memory Card or EM file memory errors indicate that the file data has been corrupted. Execute the Format extension memory command.
Replace the memory if the error is not cleared after the above processing has been performed.

| | | The communications load is too heavy when connected using Host Link (SRES: 0F). | * Use NT Link.

Reduce the size of the system word memory ($SW) allocation.

| | | Terminator has not been set (SRES:10). | Make the correct end station settings. | | Command error (MRES:26) | No protection (SRES:01). | Protection does not need to be removed because there is no protection on the program area. | | | Specified password different from registered password (SRES:02). | Specify the correct registered password. | | | Protected (SRES:03). | Use support software to remove the protection and re-execute the command. | | | More than 5 commands processing at command receive node (SRES:04). | Close or stop a service being executed and re-execute the command. | | | Service executing. (SRES:05) | Close or stop a service being executed and re-execute the command. | | | Service not executed (SRES:06). | Execute the corresponding service as required. | | | No authority to execute service (SRES:07). | Local node not in data link. Execute service from node in data link. | | | No response received due to buffer error (SRES:07). | Restart the Board. Replace the Board if the error persists. | | | Settings not made before service executed (SERS:08). | Make the required settings. | | | Required settings not made for command data (SRES: 09). | Check the command format and set the required command data. | | | Tried to register program using already registered action/ transition numbers (SRES:0A). | Change to unregistered action/transition numbers and re-execute the command. | | | Cause of error not removed (SRES:0B). | Remove the cause of the error and execute the ERROR CLEAR command. | | Access right error (MRES:30) | Another node has the access right. (SFC online edit using other node FIT is executed or ACCESS RIGHT ACQUIRE or ACCESS RIGHT FORCE ACQUIRE command executed on another node.) (SRES:01) | Wait until access rights are cleared and re-execute the command. (Execute ACCESS RIGHT FORCE ACQUIRE or ACCESS RIGHT RELEASE command to enable execution of original command. Current processing on the node that had access rights may be affected, however.) | | Abort (MRES:40) | Interrupted by ABORT command (SRES:01). | —— | | PT memory error (MRES:7F) | Exception error during processing. (SRES:05) | System program corrupted. Download the system program. If the error persists, contact your nearest OMRON representative. | | | Incorrect element type (SRES:13). | Screen data corrupted. Download screen data. | | | Incorrect start address. (SRES:1A) | Address outside range has been set. Check the setting data and use CX-Designer to correct the setting. | | | Insufficient read data buffer (SRES:1B). | System program corrupted. Download the system program. If the error persists, the PT may need repaired. Contact your nearest OMRON representative. | | | Standby processing failed for exclusive processing. (SRES:1C) | System program corrupted. Download the system program. If the error persists, the PT may need repaired. Contact your nearest OMRON representative. | | | Insufficient write data elements. (SRES:1D) | System program corrupted. Download the system program. If the error persists, the PT may need repaired. Contact your nearest OMRON representative. | | | Incorrect end address. (SRES:2B) | Address outside range has been set. Check the setting data and use CX-Designer to correct the setting. | | | Access method initialization failure (SRES:3C). | System program corrupted. Download the system program. If the error persists, the PT may need repaired. Contact your nearest OMRON representative. | | | Access method exit processing failure (SRES:3D). | System program corrupted. Download the system program. If the error persists, the PT may need repaired. Contact your nearest OMRON representative. | | | Incorrect Access Method parameters (SRES:3E). | System program corrupted. Download the system program. If the error persists, the PT may need repaired. Contact your nearest OMRON representative. | | | Other incorrect subresponse code. | The PT may need repaired. Contact your nearest OMRON representative. |

What is the countermeasure if an error occurred during macro execution?

Check the macro program of the appropriate object ID and the connection with the host.

What are the details regarding error codes, causes, and countermeasures if an error occurred during macro execution?

Error details	Cause	Possible countermeasure
0 division error	Divided by zero.	Set a numeral other than 0.
Illegal argument.	Illegal value set to function argument.	Check the set argument and make the correct setting.
Illegal program	Illegal program has been set or timeout error occurred.	Check the macro contents again and program again correctly. Check for the following: * Disconnection of the connecting cable. * Stopped host * Incorrect timeout period.
BCD code error	Value has been set that cannot be converted to BCD or BIN command argument.	Check the set argument and make the correct setting.

What functions were added or improved with the NS Series upgrade?

The following tables show the main functions that have been added or improved with the NS Series upgrade:

Ver. 3.0 Supplement/Enhancement

Function	Description
Screen data transfer	Enables transferring screen data to NS Hardware through a PLC and transferring ladder programs to the PLC through the NS Hardware.
Switch Box Function	Displays I/O status of addresses on the NS Hardware. Addresses and their comments can be reused from a ladder program using the Switch Box Utility.
Multiple language support	Multiple languages (Simplified Chinese, Korean, Traditional Chinese, etc.) can be displayed on user screens.
Video Capture	Enables performing video captures using system memory ($SB24) as a trigger.
Enhanced parts list	Vastly increased library objects for use as buttons and lamps.
Reading CLK status	Displays status of CLK Board attached with NS Hardware on the screen.
Macro to set time	Automatically sets the time, which as set manually before.
Screen data transfer	Screen data can be transferred using Ethernet directly the first time.

What functions were added or improved with the Ver. 4.0 Supplement/Enhancement?

Function	Description
Equipped with USB port	Equipped with a USB port as a standard feature enabling display contents to be printed using USB-compatible printers.
Display possible in up to 32,000 colors	BMP and JPEG images can now be displayed using up to 32,000 colors.
Screen data capacity	The data capacity has increased from 4 Mbytes to 20Mbytes.
High-speed drawing	The drawing speed is twice that of existing OMRON products.

What functions were added or improved with the Ver. 5.0 Supplement/Enhancement?

Function	Description
NS5-series models added	Added NS5-SQ0 (B) -V1 with compact 5.7-inch STN color display.
Object forms can be selected by user	The forms of ON/OFF Button, Word Button, Bit Lamp, and Word Lamp objects can now be specified as BMP or JPEG image files.
Windows fonts can be used in objects	The labels used in ON/OFF Button, Word Button, Bit Lamp, Word Lamp, and Command Button objects can now be specified using Windows fonts.
Continuous input from Bar Code Reader	Input order of numeric values and character strings can now be controlled, allowing continuous input from a bar code reader.
Ver. 1.X projects can be created and edited	CX-Designer Ver. 5.0 can be used to create and edit projects for NS System Ver. 1.X.

What functions were added or improved with the Ver. 6.0 Supplement/Enhancement?

Function	Description
A PT model added	Added NS8-TV1 (B)-V1.
Transfer program functions	Screen data can be transferred from a personal computer to the PT via modem. Installing a CLK board in the personal computer enables screen data to be transferred. CX-Server compatibility has also simplified settings required for data transfer.
Data log function	The number of always logging points has been increased from 5,000 to 50,000 points, and logging data can be automatically saved to the memory card. Saved CSV files can be read and displayed overlapping the log graph with a reference.
Video captures	Image data saved in the memory card can be specified from a list and displayed. The list can be called using the command buttons or from the system menu.
Command buttons	The appearance of command buttons can be specified as round buttons. BMP and JPEG image files can be specified for button appearance. Write confirmation messages can also be set.
Temporary input object	Objects for temporarily displaying input numerical values or character strings are provided for use when creating tenkeys or keyboards for Numerical Display & Input and String Display & Input objects using command buttons. Temporary input objects can also be used to display maximum and minimum values.
System memory	The numerical value storage format for system memory can be selected from BCD and binary. The data format for specifying line numbers in indirectly specified files for functional objects can be selected. The data format for specifying line numbers in indirectly specified files set using functional object properties can be selected from BCD and binary. The maximum number of alarms that can be registered has been increased to 5,000.
Macros	Loop processing can be performed using macros. This improves efficiency of macro creation.
CSV files	When importing CSV files, the character properties for a specified label name can be applied to the character properties for another label. This function is useful when setting multiple labels.
System memory functions	The following flags have been added:<br>* PT battery low flag<br>* PT memory card free space check flag<br>* Memory card power OFF bit<br>* Memory card removing status<br>* Video capture start bit<br>* Video capture executing flag<br>* Video capture results flag<br>* Periodical Data Log Save in process flag<br>* Print screen/video capture switching bit

What functions were added or improved with the Ver. 6.2 Supplement/Enhancement?

Function	Description
PT models added	Added NS5-SQ0@-V2, NS5-TQ0@-V2, and NS5-MQ0@-V2.
Project trigger macro added	Setting the macro to execute when the bit or value at a specified address changes has been enabled.
Data block control functions added	Data block control functions have been added to command buttons to enable reading/writing between CSV files and PLC memory, CVS files and PT memory, and PT memory and PLC memory.
Added items to system memory	The following have been added to system memory: data block control complete flag, internal holding bit/word memory ($HB/$HW) initialization flag, and data block error number.
Added arrows	Arrow heads can be added to the start and/or end of straight lines.
Expanded Alarm/Event Summary & History	The titles of each display item can now be displayed on the top line. Also, alarm messages that are not completely displayed can be touched to display them in a message box.
Added program transfer function	Screen data transfer to the PT from a personal computer has been enabled using a USB cable.
Added installation method	CX-Designer can be installed from the CX-One FA Integrated Tool Package.
Added startup method	Startup has been enabled by right-clicking the NS-series PT in the CX-Integrator<br>Network Configuration Window and selecting Start Special Application. If Start with Settings Inherited is selected, startup through to new project creation will be automatically executed.
Supported transfers to Memory Cards	Transferring data to Memory Cards from the Special Screen Area of the System Menu has been enabled.

What functions were added or improved with the Ver. 6.6 Supplement/Enhancement?

Function	Description
Multi-vendor connectivity	It is now possible to connect OMRON NS-series PTs to Mitsubishi FX-series PLCs, A-series PLCs, and Siemens S7-series PLCs.
Data security	A password can now be set for creating data. When data with a set password is transferred to a PT, the password is then required in order to upload the data. This prevents users who do not know the password from obtaining that data from the PT. In addition, a password can be required to transfer data to the PT. This prevents data from being accidentally overwritten.
User security	Once a user inputs the password to use a functional object for which a password has been set, the password does not have to be input again as long as the user continues using only functional objects for which lower level passwords have been set. Functional objects with a higher-level password cannot be manipulated. (A warning message will be displayed if an attempt is made.) This makes it possible to create applications that permit only the necessary operations by users who have entered passwords, and thus helps prevent faulty operations.
Consecutive line drawing	Data in memory is treated as X and Y coordinates, and straight lines are drawn between the applicable coordinates to create consecutive line drawing. This makes it possible to handle applications involving the drawing of various graphics in two-dimensional space that could not be drawn using the existing graph components.
Broken-line graph	* Number of monitor points: 1,000 max.<br>* Batch reading<br>* Graph overwriting<br>* Indirect specification of starting display position<br>* Indirect specification of displaying/hiding graph lines<br>* Indirect specification of displaying/hiding scale lines

What functions were added or improved with the Supplement/Enhancement?

Function	Description
Ladder Monitor	With version-2 NS-series PTs (except for the NS5-V2 and NSJ5), Ladder Monitoring is built into the PT as a standard feature, so no separate Memory Card is required. (A Memory Card is required for version-1 PTs, however, just as before.) In addition, neither version-1 nor version-2 PTs are reset when starting or ending the Ladder Monitor when Ladder Monitor version 2.8 is used. These improvements make the Ladder Monitor easier to use and reduce operating time.
Symbol table transfers	When screen data is downloaded from the CX-Designer, the symbol tables are downloaded together with it. Likewise, when screen data is uploaded, the symbol tables are uploaded too.
Log/alarm information	It is now possible to select whether log and alarm information is to be initialized when screen data is downloaded.
PLC data trace reading	Trace results from data traces (which is a CPU Unit function) can now be read by the PT and displayed in time chart format. (CSV files cannot be saved.) This makes it possible, using just the PT without CX-Programmer, to isolate the causes of errors that occur on-site.
European fonts	All Russian and Greek characters are now available, and all characters are half-width.
Video display mode	It is now possible to select from three patterns for image quality adjustment. When a visual sensor is connected, even small display characters can be read. It is now also possible to adjust the display position for RGB display.
SAP (Smart Active Parts)	SAP has been added for the EJ1 Modular Temperature Controller, G3ZA Multi-channel Power Controller, and Troubleshooters.
Temperature Controller	It is now possible to connect the EJ1 Modular Temperature Controller to the PT as a host.

What functions were added or improved with the Ver. 7.0 Supplement/Enhancement?

Function	Description
Multi-vendor connectivity	It is now possible to connect NS-series PTs to the following devices:<br>* OMRON Trajexia Motion Controllers<br>* Yaskawa MP-series Machine Controllers<br>* Yaskawa F7-series Varispeed and VS Mini V7-series Machine Controllers<br>* Mitsubishi Q-series PLCs
NT compatibility	System memory can now be allocated to PLC memory areas in the same way as for the NT Series, enabling PLC ladder programs to be easily transferred when migrating from the NT Series to the NS Series.
System memory	It is now possible to display at the next startup the screen that was being displayed when the program was closed.
Multilingual system	In addition to English and Japanese, the system now also supports German, French, Italian, Spanish, and Chinese (both traditional and simplified).
Multifunction Objects	Multifunction Objects have been added to functional objects. With Multifunction Object, multiple processes can be registered and can then be executed with the press of a button. Processes that previously required the creation of macros can now be executed by simply setting properties.
Machine Navigator	A Machine Navigator function and a functional object contents display function have been added. Machine Navigator provides unified control of text and image files (i.e., “contents”) to be displayed, and the new display function displays those contents. Contents requiring association can be managed in ID units, and the display can be easily changed by simply changing the ID specification.
Flicker function	The following flicker methods have been added.<br>* Display/hide (entire object or label)<br>* Flicker color specification (fill color, character, and line colors)
Alarm/event summary	A function has been added to provide a summary of a particular alarm/event on a single line, making it possible to quickly check conditions without unnecessary displays. A horizontal scrolling function has also been added to allow all items to be checked.
Fonts	Scalable fonts have been added to enable smooth displays. Gothic numeral and 7-segment displays have also been added to allow more attractive and up-to-date screens to be created.
Screen switching	Speed and bitmap performance have been improved for switching screens.
Connection operations	Even if one host is not connected, the monitoring results of the connected host can be displayed on the screen without “Connecting” being displayed.
SAP Library	The following information can now be displayed.<br>* Command destination port names<br>* Destination network addresses<br>* Destination node addresses<br>* Destination unit numbers<br>* DeviceNet Slave Unit address and Inverter node addresses
Bar codes	The maximum data length has been increased to 254 bytes, allowing the data to be processed by two-dimensional bar code readers.
System Menu	A list of hosts can now be displayed by selecting Communications Settings from the System Menu. It is now also possible to change the host network address, node address, and host type.
$SB18	For version 7.0 or higher, $SB18 is ON at startup to display the keypad with temporary input. For versions prior to 7.0, $SB18 is OFF at startup and the keypad without temporary input is displayed.

What functions were added or improved with the Ver. 8.0 Supplement/Enhancement?

Function	Description
CJ2 support	Connection to the CJ2 CPU Units is supported.
EtherNet/IP support	Supports tag message communications.
Ladder Monitor	Ladder Monitor functions and operability have been greatly improved. The main functions that have been added or improved are as follows:<br>* It is now possible to start the Ladder Monitor from the alarm/event summary and history, and automatically search for communications addresses set as alarm/events.<br>* The display colors and display size were changed.<br>* I/O comments can now be read from the PLC.<br>* It is now possible to switch the number of display lines in I/O comments.<br>* Address search and backward search functions have been added, and existing search functions have been improved.<br>* The number of objects that can be registered for the I/O monitor has been increased.<br>* It is now possible to change the present value or search for addresses at the cursor position.<br>* It is now possible to switch the display and input formats of the present value of a word between hexadecimal, decimal, and signed decimal format.<br>* It is now possible to perform a screen capture and save the data as a bitmap (bmp) file.

What functions were added or improved with the Supplement/Enhancement?

Function	Description
Operation log	The following functions have been added to the operation log.<br>* It is now possible to log the ON/OFF status of a specified address. Using this function, it is possible to log operations from sources other than a PT screen by, for example, allocating a communications address to switch a control panel screen.<br>* Messages can now be set in the operation log.<br>* It is now possible to save a history file (a CSV file), and display the operation log screen of the System Menu from a Multifunction Object.<br>* Multiple history files can now be saved.
PLC Data Trace	The following functions have been added to PLC data trace.<br>* Now supports data trace of words.<br>* Data trace results can now be saved in CSV format.<br>* It is now possible to perform a screen capture of the PLC Data Trace Screen and save the data as a bitmap (bmp) file.
Screen data transfer	When uploading project data from the PT, it is no longer necessary to switch to the transfer screen, or to reset the PT after the upload is complete. This makes it possible to perform screen operations from the PT even while uploading.
Multi-vendor	It is now possible to connect OMRON NS-series PTs to the following devices.<br>* SLC500 Controller manufactured by Rockwell Automation (Allen-Bradley), MicroLogix, PLC-5, CompactLogix, and ControlLogix<br>* Modbus RTU-compatible devices
Screen saver	The startup time of the screen saver can now be indirectly specified.
Alarms/events	Message characters from alarms/events can now be referenced from the character string table.
Screen Input	By turning ON/OFF a specified communications address, inputs for the entire screen can now be enabled/disabled.
NS5-series models	The following models have been added to the NS5-series. NS5-SQ10@-V2 NS5-SQ11@-V2 NS5-TQ10@-V2 NS5-TQ11@-V2 NS5-MQ10@-V2 NS5-MQ11@-V2

What functions were added or improved with the Ver. 8.1 Supplement/Enhancement?

Function	Description
Model addition	The NS15-TX01@-V2 was added.
Multivendor support	The PT can be connected to the following PLC:<br>* Yokogawa Electric FA-M3/FA-M3R-series PLCs
Printers	The PT can be connected to a PictBridge-compatible printer. (Not possible, however, for the NS12/10/8/5-V1, NS5-SQ0@@-V2, NS5-TQ0@@-V2, and NS5-MQ0@@-V2.)
Data Log Graphs	An option was added to enable displaying data log graphs without blanks for intervals when data logging was stopped.
Alarm history clear improvement	A setting was added for $SB32 in system memory so that the number of occurrences could also be cleared when initializing the alarm/event history.
Number of objects per screen	The number of object per screen has been increased.<br>* Functional objects (including frames and tables): Up to 1,024<br>* Graphic displays: Up to 2,048
Screen switching performance improvement	The speed for switching screens was improved when giving priority to displaying graphic displays and frames as the display method. (Project data version 8.1 or higher is required.)
Ladder Monitor	* The CJ2 CPU Units are now supported.<br>* A host can be connected to the PT for monitoring using EtherNet/IP.<br>* Passwords can be set for changing present values and other operations.
Screen captures	Screen captures are now supported by the NS5-@Q1@-V2.

What functions were added or improved with the Ver. 8.2 Supplement/Enhancement?

Function	Description
Device data transfer	Conditions can be set to transfer data from a source to a destination.
SPMA communications	The PLC can be accessed from the CX-Programmer through a USB cable connected to an NS-series PT. (CX-Programmer version 8.1 or higher is required.)
Batch format settings	The following can be set to the same values for all labels:<br>* Address information<br>* List data<br>* Date display objects
Batch label settings	A specified character string can be set for all of the labels for the following objects:<br>* Bit Lamp objects<br>* Bit Button objects<br>* Multi Function objects
String Display and Input objects	An input method setting was added to move the cursor to in front of the character string when the focus is set.
Analogue Meter improvements	* The shape of the needle can be set to a straight line, arrow, or triangle arrow.<br>* The line width can be changed to up to 3 dots.
Password input keyboard	The user can specify the keyboard used to input a password.
Time setting to move to System Menu	The time before moving to the System Menu when two of the four corners of the screen are pressed can be set.
Macro additions	Trigonometric and floating-point functions were added.
Screen switch settings	The default setting for the display sequence for screens now gives priority to displaying fixed objects and frames first.
Fixed objects	The method to create sectors and arcs has been improved.
Data graphs for 128 points	The total number of addresses for constant logging was increased to 128 points max.
Data blocks with 512 KB	The size of one data block was increased to 512 KB.
CP1W-CIF41 compatibility	To connect to the CP1W-CIF41, select the check box to use the CP1W-CIF41 in the Ethernet host settings under the CX-Designer communications settings.<br>Note: Attaching to the CP1E or CP2E is not supported.

What functions were added or improved with the Ver. 8.3 Supplement/Enhancement?

Function	Description
Numeral Display & Input	The input method can now be restricted to use only functional objects or bar-codes, but not both.
String Display & Input	The input method can now be restricted to use only functional objects or bar-codes, but not both.

What functions were added or improved with the Ver. 8.4 Supplement/Enhancement?

Function	Description
CJ2 data structures	Data structures for CJ2 CPU Units can now be accessed.
PictBridge support	The printing method and orientation can now be specified.
Modbus support	Bit devices can now be read.
Memory Card error detection	Added support to detect Memory Card errors at startup.
Backlight brightness	The brightness can be adjusted to any of 32 levels. (NS5-SQ1/-TQ1)

What functions were added or improved with the Ver. 8.5 Supplement/Enhancement?

Function	Description
NJ Series support	Connection to NJ-series CPU Units is now supported.
Troubleshooter support	The Troubleshooter for NJ-series Controllers is now supported.

What functions were added or improved with the Ver. 8.5 Supplement/Enhancement?

Function	Description
Backlight brightness	The brightness can be adjusted to any of 32 levels. (This is supported only for NS8 PTs with lot number 28X1 or later, NS10 PTs with lot number 11Y1 or later, and NS12 PTs with lot number 14Z1 or later.)

What functions were added or improved with the Ver. 8.6 Supplement/Enhancement?

Function	Description
NJ3 CPU Units support	Connection to NJ3 CPU Units is now supported.
Multivendor support	Communications performance has been improved for Mitsubishi Q-series Controllers.

What functions were added or improved with the Ver. 8.61 Supplement/Enhancement?

Function	Description
Exclusive control of barcodes	You can set whether to disable inputting data from barcodes while the input pad is being used.

What functions were added or improved with the Ver. 8.69 Supplement/Enhancement?

Function	Description
Backlight brightness	The brightness can be adjusted to any of 32 levels. (This is supported only for NS15 PTs with lot number 31114 or later.)

What functions were added or improved with the Ver. 8.7 Supplement/Enhancement?

Function	Description
Change in specification of GETNUMVAL	Supported that GETNUMVAL can operate even in prior to Before Inputting Numeral.

What functions were added or improved with the Ver. 8.8 Supplement/Enhancement?

Function	Description
Maximum and minimum values	When setting the maximum and minimum values with Numeral display and Input object and Thumbwheel switch, enables the difference from current value to be specified.
Indirect password specification	Enables a specific level password to be specified indirectly.

What functions were added or improved with the Ver. 8.9 Supplement/Enhancement?

Function	Description
NX Series support	Enables the NS Series to connect with the NX Series CPU Unit.

What functions were added or improved with the Ver. 8.93 Supplement/Enhancement?

Function	Description
NX1P2 Series support	Enables the NS Series to connect with the NX1P2-@@@@ CPU Unit.

What functions were added or improved with the Ver. 8.96 Supplement/Enhancement?

Function	Description
NJ/NX Series support	Enables the NS Series to connect with the NX102-@@@@CPU Unit. Enables the NS Series to connect with the NJ Series via SCU Unit.

What functions were added or improved with the Ver. 8.97 Supplement/Enhancement?

Function	Description
CP2E Series support	Enables the NS Series to connect with the CP2E Series CPU Unit. (SAP and SPMA communications are not supported for this PLC.)

What changes were made to the manual during each revision?

Revision code	Date	Revised content
01	May 2002	Original production
02	January 2003	Addition of data transfer passing through the networks<br>Addition of Switch Box function<br>Contents revised to reflect the upgrade from version 2.0 to version 3.0
03	April 2003	Addition of information related to the printing function<br>Addition of information related to “V1” models<br>Addition of information related to other version upgrades
04	October 2003	Addition of information related to the NS5-V1 Series.<br>Addition of information related to other version upgrades.
05	July 2004	Addition of information mainly related to data logs.<br>Addition of information mainly related to temporary input objects.<br>Addition of information mainly related to icon functionality.
06	February 2005	Addition of information related to the NS5-V2 Series.<br>Addition of information related to other version upgrades.
07	July 2006	Addition of information related to the CX-Designer release.<br>Addition of information related to other version upgrades.
08	July 2007	Addition of information related to CX-Designer release.<br>Addition of information related to the addition of new functions.
09	June 2008	Addition of information related to CX-Designer release.<br>Addition of information related to the addition of new functions.
10	October 2008	Changes related to version upgrade.
11	November 2008	Changes and corrections.
12	April 2009	Changes related to version upgrade.
13	May 2010	Addition of information.
14	October 2010	Changes related to version upgrade.
15	November 2010	Revisions accompanying changes to the backlight in the NS5-SQ1/-TQ1.
16	July 2011	Changes for support for NJ-series Controllers.
17	October 2011	Revisions accompanying changes to the backlight in the NS8/NS10/NS12.
18	January 2012	Changes related to version upgrade.
19	April 2012	Changes related to version upgrade.
20	December 2013	Revisions accompanying changes to the backlight in the NS15.
21	April 2015	Revisions for support for NX-Series Controllers.
22	April 2016	Revisions accompanying change in CX-One model number.
23	October 2016	Revisions accompanying support for NX1P2-series Controllers.
24	April 2017	Changes and corrections.
25	October 2018	Revisions accompanying support for NX1 Controller.
26	June 2020	Revisions accompanying support for CP2E-Series Controllers.

What are the details for Controller Link Network Status Read List?

First read address (n)	Bits	Status Details
0 to 7		Not used.
8	1	: Node address setting range error
9	1	: Duplicated node address
10	1	: Inconsistent network parameters
11	1	: Hardware error
12	1	: Communications controller send section error
13		Not used.
14		Not used.
n	15	Error information<br>1: Error log exists
0 to 7		1: Startup node address n+1 8 to 15 Startup/polling node address 1: Polling node address<br>0 Node 1
1		Node 2
2		Node 3
3		Node 4
4		Node 5
5		Node 6
6		Node 7
7		Node 8
8		Node 9
9		Node 10
10		Node 11
11		Node 12
12		Node 13
13		Node 14
14		Node 15
n+2	15	Node 16
0		Node 17
1

CLICK HERE TO DOWNLOAD OMRON NS15-TX01B-V2 (01) PDF MANUAL

OMRON NS15-TX01B-V2 (01) PDF SUMMARY:

Visitors also searched:

Leave comments, questions, reviews, tips, tricks, hacks or page errors below. Account not required.Cancel reply

Discover more from Manual-Hub.com